Dl-Ep1 Um 96140e e 1031-1

96140E
EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit
DL-EP1
Users Manual
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Introduction
This manual describes the basic operations and hardware functions of the DL-EP1. Read the manual carefully to ensure safe performance and function of the DL-EP1. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. Ensure that the end user of this product receives this manual.
Symbols The following symbols alert you to matters concerning the prevention of injury and product damage.
DANGER
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property damage.
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
Important
It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.
Point
It indicates additional information on proper operation.
Reference
It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.
It indicates reference pages.
Safety Information for DL-EP1
General Precautions
Before and while operating this product, confirm its performance and functions operate correctly. Implement sufficient safety measures to prevent human and property damage in case this product fails. Be aware that the product functions and performance are not warranted if the product is used outside the range of stated specifications or is modified by the customer. Combining this product with other equipment requires sufficient consideration because the proper functions and performance may not be met depending on the environment. Do not use this product for the purpose of protecting a human body or a part of the human body. This product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in hazardous locations and/or in a potentially explosive atmosphere. Do not expose equipment, including peripherals, to rapid temperature changes. Equipment failure may result from condensation build up.
Precautions for Use

To avoid injury or failure, turn off the power immediately in the following cases. - Water or foreign matter enters the main unit. - The case is broken, for example if it is dropped. - Smoke or unusual smell is emitted from the product. Use the correct power voltage. Failure to observe may result in injury, or failure. Do not disassemble or modify this product. Failure to observe may result in injury.
NOTICE
CAUTION
Do not turn off the power while you are setting any item. Doing this may cause loss of data settings.
Equipment Environment
For safe, trouble-free operation of this product, the product must not be installed in the following environments: Humid, dusty, or poorly ventilated. Exposed to direct sunlight or heat source. Exposed to corrosive or flammable gases. Exposed directly to vibration or shock. Exposed to water, oil, or chemical splashes. Exposed to static electricity. 96140E
Noise Protection
If this product is installed in a location near an electrical noise source, e.g., a power source or high-voltage line, it may malfunction or fail because of noise. Take protective measures, such as using a noise filter or running the cables separately.
About the Power Supply

Noise superimposed on the power supply may result in malfunction. Use a stabilized DC power supply configured with an isolation transformer. When using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the frame ground terminal.
Precautions on Regulations and Standards

UL Certification This product is an UL/C-UL Listed product. UL File No. E207185 Category NRAQ, NRAQ7 Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as an UL/CUL Listed Product. Use this product under pollution degree 2. For wiring to the power supply connector, use a power supply with Class 2 output defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electric Code). This product is an open type device. Therefore, it must be installed in an enclosure with an IP 54 or higher rating. (e.g. Industrial control panel) CE Marking Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in a member state of European Union. EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) EMI : EN55011, Class A EMS : EN61000-6-2 Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable for connection to the network. These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the endproduct itself according to EMC Directive.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -
Relevant Manuals
The manuals relevant to this document are as follows:
Manuals related to CPU unit

KVDN 20
MS NS
ON TE RM
PLC CPU unit EtherNet/IP scanner unit
Manuals related to EtherNet/IP scanner unit
This manual
DL-EP1 (this unit)
Manuals for each sensor amplifier unit Example) GT2-70 Series User s Manual IG Series User s Manual FD-MH Series Instruction Manual
Sensor amplifiers
MEMO
Manual Organization
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Before Using
This chapter provides an overview of the DL-EP1 and describes its part names and functions.
Connection and Configuration Communicating with the GT2 Series Communicating with the GT-70A Series Communicating with the IG Series Communicating with the IB Series Communicating with the FD-MH Series
This chapter describes the procedures from installing the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers to configuring communication. This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart. This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart. This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart. This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart. This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Specifications
This chapter describes the specifications and external dimensions of the DL-EP1.
Appendix
This chapter provides the parameter list, as well as troubleshooting instructions.
Table of Contents
Safety Information for DL-EP1 ..................................................................... 1 General Precautions ......................................................................... 1 Precautions for Use ........................................................................... 1 Precautions on Regulations and Standards ...................................... 2 Relevant Manuals .......................................................................................... 3 Manual Organization ..................................................................................... 5 Table of Contents .......................................................................................... 6 Terms Used in This Document ................................................................... 11
Chapter 1 Before Using

1-1 DL-EP1 Overview .............................................................................. 1-2 Overview ........................................................................................ 1-2 Connectable Sensor Amplifiers ...................................................... 1-2 Checking the Package Contents ..................................................... 1-3 Package Contents .......................................................................... 1-3 Names and Functions of Each Part ................................................. 1-4
1-2 1-3
Chapter 2 Connection and Configuration

2-1 Procedures from Installation before Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration .................................................................................... 2-2 Configuration Procedures .............................................................. 2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers ......................... 2-3 Mounting and connection to Sensor Amplifiers .............................. 2-3 Assigning ID Numbers ................................................................... 2-6 Wiring ............................................................................................... 2-10 Connecting a communication cable ............................................. 2-10 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1 ............................. 2-12 DL-EP1 Settings ........................................................................... 2-12 Configuring Communication with the Scanner ............................ 2-15 Setting the scanner ...................................................................... 2-15
2-2
2-3 2-4 2-5
Chapter 3 Communicating with the GT2 Series

3-1 3-2 3-3 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 3-2 What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 3-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 3-3 Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 3-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 3-5 Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 3-6
3-4
Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 3-6 Usable Connections ....................................................................... 3-7 Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 3-8 Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 3-15 Communication Methods ............................................................. 3-17 Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 3-20 Message Communication ............................................................... 3-21 Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 3-22 Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 3-22 Objects and Services ................................................................... 3-25 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 3-27 Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 3-28 Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 3-30 DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 3-31 Using DL Object ........................................................................... 3-46
Chapter 4 Communicating with GT-70A Series

4-1 4-2 4-3 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 4-2 What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 4-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 4-3 Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 4-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 4-5 Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 4-6 Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 4-6 Usable Connections ....................................................................... 4-7 Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 4-8 Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 4-15 Communication Methods ............................................................. 4-17 Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 4-20 Message Communication ............................................................... 4-21 Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 4-22 Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 4-22 Objects and Services ................................................................... 4-25 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 4-27 Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 4-28 Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 4-30 DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 4-31 Using DL Object ........................................................................... 4-45
4-4
Chapter 5 Communicating with IG Series

5-4
Chapter 6 Communicating with IB Series

6-1 6-2 6-3 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 6-2 What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 6-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 6-3 Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 6-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 6-5 Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 6-6 Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 6-6 Usable Connections ....................................................................... 6-7 Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 6-8 Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 6-16 Communication Methods ............................................................. 6-18 Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 6-21 Message Communication ............................................................... 6-22 Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 6-23 Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 6-23 Objects and Services ................................................................... 6-26 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 6-28 Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 6-29
6-4
Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 6-31 DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 6-32 Using DL Object ........................................................................... 6-53
Chapter 7 Communicating with FD-MH Series

7-4
Chapter 8 Specifications
8-1 8-2 8-3 Specifications .................................................................................... 8-2 Data Processing Time ...................................................................... 8-3 Dimensions ........................................................................................ 8-5
Chapter 9 Appendix
9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers ................................................ 9-2 Connectable Sensor Amplifiers ...................................................... 9-2 Mixed Connection of Sensor amplifiers .......................................... 9-3 Device Profile .................................................................................... 9-5 Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 9-6
9-2 9-3
9-4 9-5
9-6
9-7
Default Settings ................................................................................. 9-8 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC ..................................................................................................... 9-9 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC ................................................................................................ 9-9 Procedures for Communication with an Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 PLC .............................................................................................. 9-15 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ............................................................. 9-20 List of Usable Objects .................................................................. 9-20 Reading Each Object Table ......................................................... 9-21 Identity Object (Class ID: 01H) ..................................................... 9-22 Message Router Object (Class ID: 02H) ...................................... 9-25 Assembly Object (Class ID: 04H) ................................................. 9-26 Connection Manager Object (Class ID: 06H) ............................... 9-28 TCP/IP Interface Object (Class ID: F5H) ..................................... 9-30 Ethernet Link Object (Class ID: F6H) ........................................... 9-34 Index ................................................................................................. 9-39
10
Terms Used in This Document

This document uses the following terms: Term Sensor Scanner Adaptor Main unit Expansion unit Description A sensor amplifier The EtherNet/IP scanner device The EtherNet/IP adaptor device A sensor amplifier that has a power line and can operate alone A sensor amplifier that does not have a power line and must be connected to a main unit The name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving system for sensor amplifiers For example, the high-precision contact type digital sensors of the GT2-70 series support this system. Programmable logic controller A program which controls the PLC
D-bus PLC Ladder program
11
MEMO
12
Before Using
This chapter provides an overview of the DL-EP1 and describes its part names and functions.
1-1 1-2 1-3
DL-EP1 Overview ............................................... 1-2 Checking the Package Contents ........................ 1-3 Names and Functions of Each Part.................... 1-4
1-1
1-1
1
Before Using
DL-EP1 Overview
Overview
The DL-EP1 operates as an EtherNet/IP communication adaptor. EtherNet/IP communications enable you to output the ON/OFF control signals and current values of the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 as communication data to a PLC or other equipment. The DL-EP1 supports EtherNet/IP cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) and message communication (Explicit messaging). Cyclic communication enables data exchange without a ladder program. Message communication allows for reading/ writing sensor amplifier parameters and issuing commands to the sensor amplifiers. System configuration example
PLC or other host device (EtherNet/IP unit)
EtherNet
EtherNet/IP adaptor DL-EP1 (this unit)
Connectable Sensor Amplifiers

You can connect a maximum of 15 sensor amplifiers supporting D-bus to the DLEP1. You can connect single main unit to the DL-EP1 and a maximum of 14 expansion units to the main unit. (D-bus is the name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving system for sensor amplifiers.) If the sensor amplifier is D-bus compatible, different models can be connected together. How many and what types of sensor amplifiers can be connected depends on the sensor amplifiers or units to be connected. For details, refer to Sensor Amplifiers" (Page 9-2). "Connectable
1-2
1-2
Checking the Package Contents
Before using the DL-EP1, make sure that the following equipment and accessories are included in the package. We have thoroughly inspected the package contents before shipment. However, in the event of defective or broken items, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
1
Before Using
Package Contents
Package contents DL-EP1 main unit x 1 Expansion connector sticker x 1 End unit x 2 OP-26751
Instruction manual x 1 List of Optional Parts STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (Category 5e, straight) - OP-51504 (0.2 m) - OP-51505 (0.5 m) - OP-51506 (1 m) - OP-51507 (3 m) - OP-51508 (5 m) * The working ambient temperature of the above cables are 0 to 50C.
1-3
1-3
1
Before Using
Names and Functions of Each Part
This section describes the part names and functions of the DL-EP1.
(1) RJ-45 connector (2) Reset switch (3) Link/activity indicator (green) (4) Module status indicator (green/red) (5) Network status indicator (green/red) (6) Sensor communication indicator (green/red) (7) MAC address (8) Sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail mount type)
(9) Sensor amplifier connector (for panel mount type and large display type)
Name (1) RJ-45 connector (2) Reset switch
Description Attach the network cable to this connector. When held down for three seconds or longer, the DL-EP1 settings will be reset to the default settings. For details, refer to "Default Settings" (Page 9-8). "Troubleshooting" (Page 9-6). "Troubleshooting" (Page 9-6). "Troubleshooting" (Page 9-6). Normal: Green LED lights up or blinks For details, refer to For details, refer to For details, refer to Normal: Green LED lights up Normal: Green LED lights up Indicates the status of communication between the DLEP1 and sensor amplifiers. Normal: Green LED lights up For details, refer to "Troubleshooting" (Page 9-6). MAC address for this DL-EP1 Attach the sensor amplifier to this connector. When not using this connector, remove it and replace with the protective sticker.
(3) Link/activity indicator (4) Module status indicator (5) Network status indicator (6) Sensor communication indicator
(7) MAC address (8) Sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail mount type)
1-4
1-3 Names and Functions of Each Part
Name (9) Sensor amplifier connector (for panel mount/large display type)
Description Attach the sensor amplifier to this connector. A protective seal is attached when shipped from the factory. The optional expansion cable (OP-35361) is used for this connection.
1
Before Using
1-5
MEMO
1
Before Using
1-6
Connection and Configuration

This section describes procedures from installing the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers to configuring communication.
2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5
Procedures from Installation before Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration ........................................................ 2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers ........ 2-3 Wiring ............................................................... 2-10 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1... 2-12 Configuring Communication with the Scanner.. 2-15
2-1
2-1
Procedures from Installation before Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration
This section describes the procedures before you use the DL-EP1.
Configuration Procedures
2
1. Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
Connecting the DL-EP1 to sensor amplifiers (Page 2-4)
Assigning ID Numbers (Page 2-6)
2. Wiring
Connecting a communication cable (Page 2-10)
3. Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1

Setting the IP address (Page 2-12)
4. Configuring Communication with the Scanner

Setting the IP address (Page 2-15)
Registering the device profile of the DL-EP1 (Page 2-15)
Configuring the Scanner Side (Refer to each scanner manual.)
The above configurations enable communication. For the outline of scanner side configuration for communication with an Allen-Bradley scanner, refer to "Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC" (Page 9-9).
2-2
2-2
Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
This section describes how to mount the DE-EP1 on the DIN rail and to connect it to sensor amplifiers. You can connect a maximum of 15 sensor amplifiers supporting D-bus to the DLEP1. You can connect one main unit to the DL-EP1 and a maximum of 14 expansion units to the main unit. (D-bus is the name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving system for sensor amplifiers.) If the sensor amplifier is D-bus compatible, different models can be connected together. How many and what types of sensor amplifiers can be connected depends on the sensor amplifiers or units to be connected. For details, refer to "Connectable Sensor Amplifiers" (Page 9-2).
2
Mounting and connection to Sensor Amplifiers

Mounting the DL-EP1 on the DIN rail
Align the claw on the bottom of the DL-EP1 with the DIN rail. While pushing the amplifier in the direction of arrow (1), press down in the direction of arrow (2).
(3)
(2) (1)
To remove the DL-EP1, raise the amplifier in the direction of arrow (3) while pushing the DL-EP1 in the direction of arrow (1).
2-3
2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
Connecting the DL-EP1 to sensor amplifiers The EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 must be connected to sensor amplifiers before it can function. The connecting procedure varies with the mounting type of the sensor amplifiers to be connected.
2
NOTICE
Make sure that the sensor amplifiers are turned off before connecting the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1. Connecting the DL-EP1 to the sensor amplifiers when they are turned on may damage the DE-EP1.
Point
For the instructions on connecting additional sensor amplifiers, refer to the instruction manual of each sensor amplifier.
Connecting to sensor amplifiers of the DIN rail mount type
Remove the expansion protective cover from the sensor amplifier to be connected.
Sensor amplifier
Expansion protective cover
Mount the EtherNet/IP Compatible Net work Unit DL-EP1, on the DIN rail and connect it to the sensor amplifier. Insert the EtherNet I/P Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 to the sensor amplifier connector so as not to leave space between them.
Sensor amplifier EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1
Connector
Make sure that the sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail mount type) is not askew on the side face of the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 according to the figure shown below. Connecting the DL-EP1 to the sensor amplifier with the connector being askew may damage the DL-EP1.
NOTICE
Sensor amplifier connector
EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1
2-4
Mount the supplied end units (OP-26751: a set of t wo pieces) on the outer ends of the amplifier and the EtherNet/IP Compatible Net work Unit DL-EP1. Then, fix the end units with the screws on the top of each end unit (2 points x 2 units). (Tightening torque : 0.6 Nm or less) Mount the end units in the same way as the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1.
End unit
2
End unit
NOTICE
Press the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1, into full engagement with the sensor amplifier. Energizing the DLEP1 when not inserted fully may damage the DE-EP1.
Connecting to sensor amplifiers of panel mount type
Connect the sensor amplifier and the EtherNet/IP Compatible Net work Unit DLEP1, with the optional expansion cable (OP-35361).
Peel off the protective sticker. Expansion cable (Cable length: 300 mm)
NOTICE
Turn off the power supply and connect the expansion cable securely. Energizing the DL-EP1 when not inserted fully may damage the DL-EP1. Attaching or detaching the cable when the power supply is on may damage the DL-EP1.
Remove the sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail mount type) from the EtherNet/IP Compatible Net work Unit DL-EP1 using pliers. Then, attach the expansion connector sticker supplied with the DL-EP1.
Sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail moun type) Expansion connector sticker
2-5
Connecting to sensor amplifiers of large display type
1 2
Connect the sensor amplifier and the EtherNet/IP Compatible Net work Unit DLEP1 with the optional expansion cable (OP-35361).
Peel off the protective sticker
Peel off the protective sticker
Expansion cable (Cable length: 300 mm)
NOTICE
Turn off the power supply and connect the expansion cable securely. Energizing the DL-EP1 when not inserted fully may damage the DL-EP1. Attaching or detaching the cable when the power supply is on may damage the DL-EP1.
Remove the sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail mounting type) from the EtherNet/IP Compatible Net work Unit DL-EP1, using pliers. Then, attach the expansion connector sticker supplied with the DL-EP1.
Sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail mount type) Expansion connector sticker
Assigning ID Numbers
Several sensor amplifiers can be connected to the DL-EP1. ID numbers for data identification are assigned to each sensor amplifier. The method for assigning ID numbers is as follows: "ID01" to "ID15" can be assigned as ID numbers (up to 15 sensor amplifiers can be connected). ID numbers are assigned in order, starting from the sensor amplifier that is the main unit. (Optional numbers cannot be assigned.) 0 is assigned as the ID number of the DL-EP1.
2-6
Point
You cannot change the ID numbers assigned to the sensor amplifiers. In this manual, ID number 00 to ID number 15 are denoted as ID00 to ID15, respectively.
Also for cyclic communication, output, current value, and external input are assigned one by one per ID number. Data assignment depends on sensor amplifiers, so refer to Chapter 3 to Chapter 8. For DIN rail mount type
ID number 01 02 08 09 00
2
Main Expansion unit unit
Expansion Expansion unit unit
For panel mount type

ID number Sensor amplifier 01 Main unit Expansion unit Sensor amplifier
02
DL-EP1 ID number 00 08 Expansion unit Expansion unit
09
2-7
For large display type (GT2-100N/100P)

DL-EP1 ID number 00
2
Head expansion board
Sensor amplifier
GT2-100N/100P
ID01
ID02
ID03
ID04
ID05
ID06
ID07
ID08
ID09
ID10
ID11
ID01 to ID11 : ID number 01 to11
* The numbers are different from the ID numbers marked on the back of the GT2-100N/100P.
2-8
NOTICE
When the DL-EP1 is used to communicate with the GT2-100 Series, the ID numbers of the heads are ID01 for the main unit, ID02 for expansion unit 1, ID03 for expansion unit 2, ..., and ID11 for expansion unit 10. Note that these numbers differ from the ID numbers described in the GT2-100 Series Instruction Manual or User's Manual.
2
Point
ID numbers are assigned automatically, so changing the number of sensor amplifiers or their connection sequence may require control program modification. In addition, some units are restricted in their connection sequence (e.g., a unit that must be the first connection). For this reason, keep these in mind when creating a control program. An "unassigned ID error" occurs if more sensor amplifiers are connected than the maximum number of connectable amplifiers . "Error code list" (Page 3-13) "Connectable Sensor Amplifiers" (Page 9-2) For the GT2-100 series, set the effective IDs correctly. Otherwise, correct communication is not assured. For details on effective ID settings, refer to the GT2-100 Series User's Manual.
2-9
2-3
Wiring
The DL-EP1 uses the power supplied to sensor amplifiers, so there is no power cable wiring. This section describes the wiring of communication cables used by the DLEP1.
2
Connecting a communication cable

Use the following procedures to connect the DL-EP1 to the communication cable required for EtherNet/IP communication. Usable cable Usable cables depend on whether the system is configured with 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX. Structuring a 10BASE-T system When the system is configured with 10BASE-T, use a Category 3 or higher shielded twistedpair (STP) cable or an unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable.
STP/UTP cable
Structuring a 100BASE-TX network When the system (network) is configured with 100BASE-TX, use a Category 5 or higher STP or UTP cable. Do not use a Category 3 or Category 4 UTP cable.
Point
Use a STP/UTP straight cable when connecting the DL-EP1 to an Ethernet switch. Use a STP/UTP cross cable when directly connecting the DL-EP1 to a PC. Do not use the STP/UTP cross cable incorrectly because it is difficult to distinguish this cable from the STP/UTP straight cable in appearance. When the system (Ethernet) is configured with a type (e.g., 10BASE-2 or 10BASE-5) other than 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX, use an Ethernet switch with an AUI (MAU) connector or a BNC connector or use a media converter (10BASE5 10BASE-T or 10BASE2 10BASE-T).
2-10
2-3 Wiring
DL-EP1 connector port The DL-EP1 connector port accepts an RJ-45 8-pole modular connector (ISO8877 compliant) used with 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX and complies with the IEEE802.3 Standards. Precautions for connecting a STP/UTP cable to the DL-EP1 connector port Take care not to apply a load to the DL-EP1 connector port when connecting the STP/UTP cable to the DL-EP1. The cable may be bent and used when installed. Bending the cable at a sharp angle may cut the wires in the cable or the cable may be disconnected during use. Install or lay the cable to be used with attention to the recommended bending radius R of the cable.
2
NOTICE
Connecting the DL-EP1 to EtherNet/IP The following describes how to connect the DL-EP1 to the RJ-45 connector.
1 2
Turn off the power supply. Connect one modular jack of the STP/UTP cable to the 10BASE-T/100BAS port of the Ethernet switch to be used. Insert the modular jack until a "click" is heard. The modular jack and connector will lock.
Point
Keep the length of the STP/UTP cable to be used 100 m or less. Carefully check the state of connector (port) on the Ethernet switch before connecting the DL-EP1. There are various Ethernet switches. Some Ethernet switches have a different shape connector (AUI connector or BNC connector, etc.) from the RJ-45, while some have connectors used to connect Ethernet switches together (cascade ports).
Connect the modular jack on the other end of the STP/UTP cable to the DL-EP1 connector port. Insert the jack until a "click" is heard. The modular jack and connector will lock.
2-11
2-4
Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1
This section describes settings for connecting the DL-EP1 to the EtherNet/IP system.
DL-EP1 Settings
The following describes how to set communication with the DL-EP1.
2
Setting the IP address Set the IP address with the DL-EP1 wired and with the power supplied. By default, the IP address is not set. However, you can use the BOOTP client function to set the IP address via Ethernet. The following 2 methods are available for setting the IP address. Use the IP address setting tool (this tool can be downloaded from the Keyence web site http://www.keyence.com). Refer to the following setting procedures or the "IP Setting Tool User's Manual". Use an IP address setting tool from other sources. Refer to the manuals provided by the respective sources. Using the IP address setting tool Here briefly describes the procedures for setting the IP address with the IP address setting tool. For details on how to use the IP address setting tool, refer to the "IP Setting Tool User's Manual". You can view the "IP Setting Tool User's Manual" from [Help(H)] of "IP Setting Tool" as the PDF file.
Start the IP Setting Tool. Devices such as the DL-EP1 connected to the network and for which their IP addresses are not set will appear. To display the devices for which their IP addresses are not set, click the [Scan EtherNet/IP devices (A)] button.
2-12
2-4 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1
Point
To display "Not Set" for the IP address, the net work status indicator (NS) must be off (IP address not assigned). To unassign the IP address, hold down the Reset switch on the DL-EP1 for three seconds or longer.
2
Select the device for which to set the IP address and click [Setup IP addr.(I)] to display [Setup IP addr.]. Compare the MAC address to be displayed with the front MAC address on the DL-EP1 and select the device for which to set the IP address. Set an IP address which is not currently used in "IP addr.(required)(I)" and click the [OK] button. Connection and Configuration
Reference
Using the [Search available IP addresses (F)] button enables you to search for open IP addresses.
2-13
2-4 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1
3 2
The IP address has now been set.
Reference
What is BOOTP? BOOTP is the abbreviation of BOOT strap Protocol. This protocol is used by the client device in the TCP/IP network to make the network settings assigned from the server. If there is a BOOTP server in the same network as the device running as the BOOTP client, an IP address is assigned to the device connected as the BOOTP client.
BOOTP client IP address assignment BOOTP server
Via Ethernet Ethernet
2-14
2-5
Configuring Communication with the Scanner
This section describes scanner side configuration for connecting the DL-EP1 to the EtherNet/IP system. When communicating with an Allen-Bradley scanner, also refer to the "Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC" (Page 9-9).
Setting the scanner

Connecting the DL-EP1 to the EtherNet/IP scanner requires the following settings: Setting the IP address Set the IP address of the scanner. Registering the device profile of the DL-EP1 Register the device profile of the adaptor (DL-EP1) to be connected using the scanner's setting software. You can register the device profile manually or by reading the EDS (Electronic Data Sheet) file. You can download the EDS file of the DL-EP1 from the Keyence web site (http://www.keyence.com). Configuring communication with the DL-EP1 The DL-EP1 uses EtherNet/IP cyclic communication or message communication to communicate with the scanner. Cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) This function sends and receives data at a set RPI (Requested Packet Interval). Selecting the communication method called "connection" and assigning the devices to be sent and received on the scanner side enables the DL-EP1 to communicate with the scanner without creating a ladder program. Message communication (Explicit messaging) This function is used to send and receive data which does not need to be timed. Use this function when changing the sensor amplifier settings or when performing EtherNet/IP communication with the scanner (e.g., Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series) that does not support cyclic communication. This function uses a ladder program to create a message on the scanner side for communication. For more information on setting each communication method, refer to the chapters titling "Communicating with...." of each sensor amplifier as well as the manuals enclosed with each scanner.
Reference
2
This manual explains only the EtherNet/IP scanner functions and settings required for communication with the DL-EP1. For details on the functions and settings between the EtherNet/IP scanner and CPU unit, refer to the manuals enclosed with the scanner and CPU unit.
2-15
2-5 Configuring Communication with the Scanner
MEMO
2
2-16
Communicating with the GT2 Series
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart. 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 What is EtherNet/IP?.......................................... 3-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ... 3-3 Cyclic communication......................................... 3-5 Message Communication ................................. 3-21
3-1
3-1
What is EtherNet/IP?
EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.). Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as EtherNet/IP (Industrial Protocol). Communication is realized by combining the protocols known as Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) with TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used together with the network. Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the side to be opened is called the "adaptor". (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.) EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and receives data periodically. Message communication (Explicit messaging) which sends and receives commands and responses at a time specified by the user. Cyclic communication enables you to set RPI (Requested Packet Interval) according to the priority of the data to be exchanged, allowing the entire communication load to be adjusted for data exchange. Message communication enables you to exchange the required commands and responses at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor settings.
3
Scanner
High speed (Communication cycle: 10 ms)
Low speed (Communication cycle: 1000 ms)
Regular speed (Communication cycle: 100 ms) Adaptor Adaptor Adaptor
3-2
3-2
DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
This section describes the EtherNet/IP functions supported by the DL-EP1. The DL-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP adaptor, and supports both cyclic and message EtherNet/IP communications.
Sensor amplifier
Output
EtherNet/IP scanner
DL-EP1
Output
Comparator Value
Error information Comparator Value External input Output
IN area
Cyclic communication
Output Current value Error information
3
Setting value
Error information External input
Comparator Value
External input Setting value
OUT area
Setting value Error information
External input
IN area
Message communication
OUT area
Direct read/write of various parameters
Overview of Communication Methods

The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions: Communication Methods Function of sensor amplifier Read status Read output Read current value Execute external input Change bank number Rewrite setting value Motion command Read current value, setting, and status Read number of decimal places Rewrite setting value Lock all Cyclic communication (Page 3-5) Message Communication (Page 3-21)
X
3-3
3-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
Cyclic communication This function sends and receives data between the scanner and DL-EP1 at the set RPI (Requested Packet Interval). The function can exchange data such as the sensor amplifier's output signals and comparator values and error status without ladder programs.
PLC EtherNet/IP scanner
3
Point
* RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set individually for each connection.
RPI=10 (ms)* RPI=5 (ms)* RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)* Ethernet
Various EtherNet/IP adaptors
Configurations such as RPI and data size for cyclic communication are set on the scanner side. In a net work which has many connected devices, including EtherNet/IP devices, a delay or packet loss could occur if a large load is constantly or temporarily applied on the net work. Verify the settings carefully before operation.
Message communication Message communication can be used for applications which do not require a punctuality like cyclic communication. In message communication, various parameters, including data which can be exchanged with cyclic communication, can be read and written. Functions specific to sensors such as the sensor amplifier preset function can also be executed.
3-4
3-3
This section describes the cyclic communication functions and how to use them. What is cyclic communication? Cyclic communication is a function that exchanges data with the EtherNet/IP device in a cyclic manner (at a set cycle). In cyclic communication, data can be exchanged when one device successfully opens a logical communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which opens the connection is called the scanner, and the side to be opened is called the adaptor. (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.) Cyclic communication is started in the following procedures: (1) The scanner requests the adaptor to open the connection. (2) The adapter side checks compatibility. (3) If no error occurs as a result the compatibility check, the adapter opens the connection. (* If an error is found during the compatibility check, the adapter does not open the connection.) "Checking the Device Compatibility" (Page 3-20)
3
(1) Request connection open (2) Check compatibility (3) Open connection
Data is exchanged between the EtherNet/IP scanner, DL-EP1 and each sensor amplifier as follows:
EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
Output data IN area Cyclic communication Data reflected in the scanner
Data between sensors is refreshed
Input data OUT area Cyclic communication The data output from the scanner is stored by the DL-EP1. Data between sensors is refreshed
Reference
To carry out EtherNet/IP communication with a scanner which does not support cyclic communication (Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series, etc.), use "Message Communication" (Page 3-21).
3-5
3-3 Cyclic communication
Configuring Cyclic Communication

The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the DLEP1. [DL-EP1] The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.
3
[Scanner] (1) Set the connection to be used. (2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication. Refer to the scanner manual for details on how to make the above settings. (* No ladder program is required when cyclic communication is used.)
Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication

Cyclic communication can use the following functions: (1) Read status (2) Read output (Page 3-17) Outputs that can be read: HIGH output, LOW output, GO output, HH output, LL output (3) Read P.V. value (Page 3-19) (4) Execute external input (Page 3-18) Inputs that can be used: PRESET, TIMING, RESET, error clear
3-6
Usable Connections
EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type usable by each device is defined in the EDS file. The DL-EP1 can use the following connections: No Connection Name Input/Output Assembly Instance Size (Byte) RPI Range (in 0.5 ms) Application Type
3
DL-EP1 to Monitor Data scanner 1 And External Scanner to Input DL-EP1 DL-EP1 to Monitor Data scanner 2 (Input Only) Scanner to DL-EP1
Reference
64H (100) 168 65H (101) 10 64H (100) 168 FEH (254) 0
0.5 ms to Exclusive 10000 ms Owner
0.5 ms to Input Only 10000 ms
Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection type supports both point-to-point and multicast. The details of each application type are as follows: Exclusive Owner: This connection allows simultaneous setting of both data transmission from the scanner to the DL-EP1 and data transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is made not only when the scanner monitors the adaptor (DL-EP1) data, but also when it issues external inputs and rewrites the settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be opened to one adaptor (DL-EP1). Input Only: This connection allows only data transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is made when the scanner only monitors adaptor (DL-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an "Input Only" connection simultaneously to one adaptor (DLEP1). (* To simultaneously open connections from multiple scanners, set the Connection Type to Multicast.
3-7
Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner)

The data from the DL-EP1 is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's IN area.
DL-EP1 data
Address 0 Address 1
3
Monitor Data (Assembly Instance: 100)
Scanner IN area
Address 167 1-byte (8-bit) data
Reference
The data such as 16-bit data extending over multiple bytes is stored into an area which starts with an even address in order from the lowest-order byte.
Example)
High-order byte Low-order byte 16-bit data Address 40 to 41 16-bit data Address 42 to 43 12H 56H 34H 78H 43 56H 42 78H 41 12H 40 34H
High-order byte Low-order byte 32-bit data Address 48 to 51 12H 34H 56H 78H
51 12H
50 34H
49 56H
48 78H
3-8
Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H This is the device map for the monitor data to be assigned to the IN area. For details on each parameter, refer to "Parameter List" (Page 3-11). For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current Value 0/ Current Value 1" (Page 3-12).
Name Address (Byte) 0 Status 1 Sensor Error Status Sensor Warning Status Current Value 0 Over Range Current Value 0 Under Range Current Value 0 Invalid Current Value 1 Over Range Current Value 1 Under Range Current Value 1 Invalid Output 1 (HIGH) Output 2 (LOW) Output 3 (GO) Output 4 (HH) Output 5 (LL) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Error Status ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID15 ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 DL-EP1 Error Status Reserved for system ..... ..... ID01
Reserved for system Warning Status
3
ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
3-9
Name External Input Response 1 (Preset) External Input Response 2 (Timing) External Input Response 3 (Preset) External Input Response 4 (Error Clear) External Input Response 5 (Unassigned) Error ID Number Error Code Warning ID Number Warning Code
Address (Byte) 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 : 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 : 164 165 166 167
bit7 ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system
bit6
bit5
bit4 .....
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0 ID01
ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
3
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09
Current Error ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer) Current Error Code (16-bit unsigned integer) Current Warning ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer) Current Warning Code (16-bit unsigned integer)
ID Number 1 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)
Current Value 0 (Comparator Value (P.V.) or Raw Value (R.V.))
Current Value 1 (Unassigned)
3-10
Parameter List
Item Description
The error status of the DL-EP1 is output. DL-EP1 Error ON: An error occurred. Status OFF: No error occurred. Warning Status (Unassigned) The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor amplifiers are output. When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0 Error Status is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor amplifiers. OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers. The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is output. Sensor Error Status ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number. OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number. Sensor Warning (Unassigned) Status The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is output. Current Value n ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID Over Range number is greater than the measurement upper limit. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less than the measurement upper limit. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT2 Series.) The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is output. Current Value n ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less Under Range than the measurement lower limit. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is greater than the measurement lower limit. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT2 Series.) The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is output. Current Value n ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is Invalid invalid. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is valid (normal). (* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT2 Series.) The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is output. Output 1: HIGH output Output 2: LOW output Output n (n: 1 to 5) Output 3: GO output Output 4: HH output*1 Output 5: LL output*1 ON: Output n is output. OFF: Output n is not output. An external input response is output when the corresponding external input request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication. External Input The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output. Response ON: The external input request was made (ON). n (n: 1 to 5) OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF). For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-18).
3
3-11
Item
Description If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored. Error priority: (1) DL-EP1 error (2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the highest priority)* * If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error with the smallest ID number has the highest priority. If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored. Error priority: (1) DL-EP1 error (2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the highest priority)* * If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error with the smallest ID number has the highest priority. "Error code list" (Page 3-13) (Unassigned) (Unassigned) The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value 0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value 1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0 to 1) depend on the use conditions. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT2 Series.) "Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 3-12)
Error ID Number
3
Error Code
Warning ID Number Warning Code
Current Value n (n: 0 to 1)
*1 There is no assigned output in GT2-71MC*. Current Value 0/Current Value 1

Name Model Conditions When calculation mode is OFF When calculation mode is ON (standard difference) When calculation mode is ON (other than standard difference) When calculation-only mode is used Current Value 1 Main unit/ expansion unit Function Comparator value (P.V.) Comparator value (P.V.) Raw value (R.V.) Comparator value (P.V.) (Unassigned)
Current Value 0
Main unit/ expansion unit
3-12
Error code list The following error codes may occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers. DL-EP1
Error ID Number Code 0 Description No error Cause Check if the number of connected sensor amplifiers exceeds the maximum number of sensor amplifiers that can be connected to the main unit. "Connectable Sensor Amplifiers" (Page 9-2) Check the connection with the sensor amplifiers and then turn the power on again. If this error cannot be recovered, contact your nearest KEYENCE office. Check the connection with the sensor amplifiers and then turn the power on again. If this error cannot be recovered, contact your nearest KEYENCE office. Check the model of the connected sensor amplifier and remove the sensor amplifier if it is not supported by the DL-EP1. Check if the models are mixable. "Mixed Connection of Sensor amplifiers" (Page 9-3) Check the connection with the sensor amplifiers and then turn the power on again. If this error cannot be recovered, contact your nearest KEYENCE office. Use sensor amplifiers within the allowable range. Check if there is a noise source around the DL-EP1. If the sensor communication indicator is flashing red, turn the power on again. Check the IP address setting. Actions
3
51
Unassigned ID error
The main unit assigned no ID within 10 seconds after the DL-EP1 had been started.
52
Start-time communication error
Communication between sensor amplifiers ended abnormally before ID assignment completion.
0 53
Unsupported sensor amplifier connection error
A sensor amplifier not supported by the DL-EP1 is connected.
54
Mixed model error
Sensor amplifiers outside the specifications have a mixed connection. ID number assignment is successful but communication failed during the subsequent initial communication. The number of connected sensor amplifiers exceeds the allowable range. An error occurred during communication between sensor amplifiers. The IP address is the same as another device.
55
56
Current limitation error Communication error between sensor amplifiers IP address duplicate error
57
70
3-13
Error ID Number
Code 100 101 102 103 104 150 151 152
Description System error System error System error System error System error System error System error System error
Cause The IP address is incorrect. A default gateway setting error occurred. An attempt to read data in EEPROM such as the MAC address has failed. An attempt to start the protocol stack has failed. An attempt to access FlashROM has failed. The number of held IDs is incorrect. The number of sensors is incorrect. An initial read error occurred.
Actions
3
Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
GT2 Series
Error ID Number Code Description Sensor amplifier error 1 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 2 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 3 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 4 of each ID numbe Sensor amplifier error 5 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 6 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 7 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 8 of each ID number Cause Actions
01H
Overcurrent error (ErC)
02H
Head error (ErH)
03H
EEPROM error (ErE) Jam check error (Er.ChK) Self-timing delay error (Er.dLY) Number-of-units error (Er.Unit) Calculation error(Er.CAL) Calculation-only mode error (Er.noH)
01H to 0FH (Each ID number)
04H
Refer to the GT2 Series User's Manual.
05H
06H
07H
08H
Warning code list No warning code occurs in the DL-EP1 and in the GT2 Series sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1.
3-14
Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1)

The data to the sensor amplifier is assigned to the OUT area of the EtherNet/IP scanner.
DL-EP1 data
External Input (Assembly Instance: 101) Address 0 Address 1 Address 9 1-byte (8-bit) data
Scanner's OUT area
3
External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H
Name External Input Request 1 (Preset) External Input Request 2 (Timing) External Input Request 3 (Reset) External Input Request 4 (Error Clear) External Input Request 5 (Unassigned) Address (Byte) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 bit7 ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID15 ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... bit6 bit5 bit4 ..... ..... bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
3-15
Parameter List
Name External Input Request 1 External Input Request 2 External Input Request 3 External Input Request 4 External Input Request 5 Function Preset Operation ON: Executes preset. Executing preset turns on external input response 1. OFF: Turns off external input response 1. ON: Turns on timing. Turning on timing also turns on external input response 2. OFF: Turns off timing. Turning off timing also turns off external input response 2. ON: Executes reset. Executing reset turns on external input response 3. OFF: Turns off external input response 3. ON: Executes error clear. Executing error clear turns on external input response 4. OFF: Turns off external input response 4. (Unassigned)
Timing execution
3
Reset Request
Error clear
(Unassigned)
3-16
Communication Methods
The following describes how the scanner cyclically communicates with the DL-EP1 (cyclic communication). "Reading an output from a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-17) "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-18) "Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers" (Page 3-19) For the message communication method, refer to "Message communication" (Page 3-4).
3
Reading an output from a sensor amplifier

Available outputs: HIGH, LOW, GO, HH, and LL Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H" (Page 3-9)
PLC Output of sensor amplifier IN area [18] Bit0 1 0
Sensor amplifier Output HIGH output of ID 01
ON OFF
(1)
This example shows how to read the HIGH output from the sensor amplifier ID01. (1) The output from the sensor amplifier entered into the IN area via cyclic communication.
Point
To use the HH output and LL output, set "Special Output Setting" of the sensor amplifier to "5-Output".
3-17
Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier

Available external inputs: PRESET, TIMING, RESET, error clear Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H" (Page 3-15)
PLC External Input request OUT area [2]Bit0 External Input response 1 0 1 0
(1)
(2)
3
IN area [30]Bit0
Sensor amplifier
ON External Input OFF External input 2 to ID 01
This example shows how to enter a TIMING input to the sensor amplifier ID01. (1) The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor amplifier is turned on or off. (2) You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input response.
Point
To use the TIMING input, set "Simultaneous Input Setting" of the sensor amplifier to "Individual Input". To use the TIMING input, set the "Timing Type" of the sensor amplifier to "External Timing Input".
Reference
After the external input is executed, the button operation of the sensor amplifiers is locked for about 10 seconds. "COM-Lock ( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds during switching to the locked state or when an attempt is made to operate a locked button. When button operation is unlocked, "COM-Unlock ( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds. However, the initialization screen appears when an initialization reset is executed. If an external input is repeatedly executed when the initialization screen is being displayed, the initialization screen is retained.
3-18
Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers

Comparator values (P.V. values) are read from the IN area to which the ID number of each sensor amplifier is assigned. Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H" (Page 3-9)
PLC Comparator value property Each bit of IN [6, 8,10] Comparator value of ID 01 IN area [48 to 51] Comparator value of ID 02 IN area [52 to 55] Comparator value of ID 03 IN area [56 to 59] 3456 8901 2345 5678 7890 1234 4567 6789
(2)
3
Sensor amplifier Comparator value of ID 01 Comparator value of ID 02 Comparator value of ID 03 1234 2345 3456
(1)
4567 5678 7890 8901 6789
This example shows how to read the comparator values from the sensor amplifiers ID01, ID02, and ID03. (1) When the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication. If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -199.9999 to 199.9999. If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is retained without updating the current value. (2) The properties of the comparator value (Current Value n Over Range (each bit of IN area [6]), Current Value n Under Range (each bit of IN area [8]), and Current Value n Invalid (each bit of IN area [10]) are entered. If the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is "over", "under," or "invalid," the bit corresponding to the ID number of that sensor amplifier is set to 1. *For the GT2 Series, the comparator value is stored in the current value 0.
3-19
Checking the Device Compatibility

Compatibility check is a function executed when the scanner communicates with the DL-EP1. This function checks if the device set with the scanner matches the DL-EP1 to prevent communicating with the wrong device. This function is executed when a connection is opened. When using scanners of other manufacturers For how to use the scanners of other manufacturers, refer to the manual of each scanner.
3
3-20
3-4
Message Communication
This section describes the message communication functions and how to use them. What is Message communication (Explicit messaging)? Message communication is a function that performs communication by issuing commands using the objects and services (Service Codes) prepared for each EtherNet/IP device. Message communication is used for applications which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor settings. The objects and service codes which can be used with message communication include those which are specified as a standard and those which are unique to the device. You can use the objects and services unique to the DL-EP1to monitor data, to read and write parameters, and to perform operations such as reset.
Scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
3
(1) Message communication command

Send Receive
(2) Interpret and execute command

Receive Send
(3) Message communication response
Reference
The DL-EP1 message communication function supports CIP-defined UCMM (unconnected) and Class 3 (connected) message communication.
3-21
3-4 Message Communication
Configuring Message Communication

The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DLEP1. [DL-EP1] The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.
3
[Scanner] Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services" (Page 3-25) Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable commands.
Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication

The following lists the contents that can be executed by message communication when the objects (DL Object) and services unique to the DL-EP1 are used. (1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier (2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier (3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier (4) Locking sensor amplifier operations (5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier (1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier Message communication reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Scanner GT2-7 DL-EP1
Command
Response: 123456
<Details of command> Service code: 0EH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0325H (805) GT2-7 Comparator values (P. V. values): 123456
"(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-46)
3-22
(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Scanner Command: 6000 GT2-7 DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 10H Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0399H(921) Service data: 6000 GT2-7 jam detection position: 50006000
Response
3
"(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-47) (3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier Message communication issues operation commands such as preset to the DLEP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Scanner Command GT2-7 DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 4BH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0301H(769) Preset execution by GT2-7
Response
"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-48) (4) Locking sensor amplifier operations Message communication locks operations by keys on the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Scanner Command GT2-7 DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 4CH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 00H Service data: 01H Changes using the sensor amplifier keys are locked.
Response
* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch a bank. "(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 3-49)
3-23
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier Message communication reads the number of decimal places of settings read from the sensor amplifier.
Command <Details of command> Service code: 4CH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0325H(805) Reads the number of decimal places of the GT2-7 comparator value (P.V. value).
Response
3
"(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-51)
Reference
For the GT2 Series, if the current value is 12.53 mm, data is stored as follows: Data: 125300 Number of decimal places: 4
12530012.530012.53mm
Number of decimal places 4 3 2 1
Perform calculation from the read data and the number of decimal places.
Point
If message communication writes data to a sensor amplifier, issues an operation command to the sensor amplifier, or locks sensor amplifier operations, the sensor amplifier button operations are locked for about 10 seconds. "COM-Lock ( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds during switching to the locked state or when an attempt is made to operate a locked button. When button operation is unlocked, "COM-Unlock ( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds.
3-24
Objects and Services

Message communication uses objects and services to send and receive data. Executing a service (1) for a DL-EP1 object enables data read (2), parameter change (3), specified operation execution (4), and read of the number of decimal places (5), etc.
DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier connected to DL-EP1 Object Service (1) (3) (4) Data output (2) (5) Parameter change Operation command execution Read of the number of decimal places
3
Taking DL Object as an example, one instance is provided for each of the sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1. Reading the attributes corresponding to the comparator values (P.V. values) of the respective instances using a service makes it possible to read the comparator values (P.V. values) of the sensor amplifiers corresponding to the respective instances.
DL Object (Class ID: 67H)
DL-EP1 Instance ID: 00H
ID number 1 sensor Instance ID: 01H
Attribute : ID: 0324H Output ID: 0325H Current value (instantaneous flow rate) ID: 0326H Raw value (R.V. value) :
3-25
Reference
3
In EtherNet/IP (CIP), the method called "object modeling" is used to express a device. The device is handled as a group of objects. Objects abstractly express the configuration elements in the device. A class is a group of objects expressing the configuration elements of the same type. An instance actually expresses a specific object contained in a class. Each instance in the class has the same attribute group, but each uses a unique attribute value. To execute a service for the DL-EP1, send a command from the scanner. The DL-EP1 then returns the service execution results as a response. A command requires a service, class ID (Class ID), instance ID (Instance ID), and attribute ID (Attribute ID)*. When a parameter is written, the command also requires a setting (service data).
Command Service Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID* Service data* Response General Status Additional Status* Service response data*
* Some of the commands to be used may not require the above items. "Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication" (Page 3-28)
3-26
Objects Usable by DL-EP1

The following describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.
EtherNet/IP unit
DL Object Identity Object Assembly Object
Command
Response
Message Router Object
Connection Manager Object
TCP/IP Interface Object
Ethernet Link Object
3
Object Name
Class ID
Description This object provides the statuses of the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 and writes and reads parameters. This object is unique to the DL-EP1. This object provides identification information, general information and a reset service, etc. This object provides connection points for message communication. This object provides access to the devices via cyclic communication. This object can be used to send data to the devices that do not support cyclic communication. This object is used for connection-type communication. This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/ IP network interface. You can set an IP address, subnet mask and gateway, etc., in this object. This object provides Ethernet status information.
Reference Page
DL Object
67H
3-31
Identity Object Message Router Object Assembly Object Connection Manager Object TCP/IP Interface Object Ethernet Link Object
01H 02H
9-22 9-25
04H
9-26
06H F5H F6H
9-28 9-30 9-34
3-27
Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication

The EtherNet/IP scanner and the DL-EP1 exchange Explicit messages for communication. The following provides a basic example of the command format of Explicit messages to be sent and the response format returned from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. Commands
3
Command format
Item Service code*1 Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Description Designates the service code to be used (Service Code). Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used. Designates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used. Designates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used. Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
*1 For details on usable services, refer to 31) or Responses Response format

Item General status Additional status Service response data
"DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 3-
"Objects Usable by DL-EP1" (Page 9-20).
Description Returns a general status in respect to the command (General Status). 00H is returned when the command ends normally. Returns the additional status (Additional Status). Returns service response data Service Response Data) in respect to the command.
3-28
Command processing order and error response Check whether each ID is within the supported range in the following order:
Path Destination Unknown (05H) returned as general status
Class ID check No Yes
Instance ID check No Yes
3
No Service not Supported (08H) returned as general status
Service check Yes
Attribute ID check No Yes Executes supported service process
Attribute not Supported (14H) returned as general status
Supplement for object processing Get_Attribute_Single and Get_Attributes_All are executed, ignoring send service data. The service (Get_Attributes_All, Reset) that does not designate an attribute ID is executed, ignoring Attribute ID. If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for an attribute which cannot be written (Set), "0EH" (Attribute not settable) is returned as the general status. If Set_Attribute_Single for the writable attribute is designated and the writing size is less than the attribute size, the general status "13H" (Not enough data) is returned. If the writing size is greater than the attribute size, the service is executed, ignoring the excessive data.
3-29
Reading the DL Object Table

Reading the attribute ID Example) Excerpt from DL Object attribute ID
(1) Instance ID (2) Attribute ID (3) Name (4) Description Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is set to ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system (5) Attribute (6) Data Type
3
00H
74H (116)
Output 1
WORD
Item (1) Instance ID (2) Attribute ID (3) Name (4) Description
Description Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation. Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation. Represents the attribute name. Describes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of parameters that can be set. Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID. R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single, Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value. W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used to write the attribute value. Represents the attribute data type.
(5) Attribute
(6) Data type
Data Type The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:
Range Data Type INT UINT DINT WORD DWORD STRING Description Minimum Signed 16-bit integer Unsigned 16-bit integer Signed 32-bit integer Bit string: 16 bits Bit string: 32 bits Character string (2-byte length information + 1-byte array per character) -32768 0 -2147483648 Maximum 32767 65535 2147483647 -
3-30
DL Object (Class ID:67H)

The DL Object provides the DL-EP1 connection status and device write/read. This object is unique to the DL-EP1. Services
Service Code Service Name Description Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service, refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-46). Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service, refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-47). Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier. Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the object. refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)" (Page 3-48). For examples of using this service, refer to "(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-48). Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code 09H is returned as a response. Setting 0: Not lock Setting 1: Full key lock Setting 2: Key lock "Lock setting" (Page 3-32) For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 3-49). * If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch the bank. Acquisition of the number of decimal places *3 Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-51).
0EH
Parameter read
3
10H
Parameter write
4BH*1
Operation command
4CH
Batch lock setting*2
4DH
*1 This service cannot be used in the DL-EP1 (instance ID:00H). *2 This service cannot be used in the sensor amplifier (instance ID: 01H to 0FH) connected to the DL-EP1. *3 In the DL-EP1 (instance ID: 00H), this service can be used as the attribute ID 90H to 9EH and A0H to AEH.
3-31
Lock setting
Setting Description Does not execute lock. Executes full key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen display switching). Executes key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen display switching and [RESET] button).
0 1 2
3
Responses The responses made when each service is used are as follows: (1) Parameter read: : Service code 0EH (2) Parameter write: : Service code 10H (3) Operation command: : Service code 4BH (4) Batch lock setting: : Service code 4CH (5) Read of number of decimal places: : Service code 4DH
General Status 00H 05H 08H 09H Command Type Description (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Normal end The instance ID is out of range. The designated instance ID does not support this service or cannot be executed. The written data is out of range. Parameter write was executed for the function controlled by cyclic communication. An attempt to execute the operation command has failed. Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation command. An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the unwritable status. The written data is out of range. An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the unreadable status. The service data size is less than the defined size. The defined data size is stored in the additional status. The attribute ID is out of range. The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated instance ID is not connected. This service is supported by the designated instance ID but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID. (Additional status: C350H) In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be written into the parameter. (Additional status: C351H) The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional status: C352H) System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
0CH
0EH
10H 13H 14H 16H

-

1FH
FEH
3-32
Attributes
Instance ID Attribute ID Name Description Indicates the status of this unit and connected sensor amplifier. Bit 0: DL-EP1 Error Status Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system Bit14: Warning Status Bit15: Error Status Indicates the error status of the connected senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned to ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system (Unassigned) Attribute Data Type
64H (100)
Status
WORD
65H (101)
Sensor Error Status
WORD
3
66H (102) 67H (103)
Warning Status
WORD
Reserved for system Indicates the status of current value 0 of each amplifier. If the current value 0 is 0ver Range", Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit corresponding to the ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system Indicates the status of current value 1 of each amplifier. If the current value 1 is "0ver Range", "Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit corresponding to the ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system
68H (104) 00H
Current Value 0 Property
WORD
69H (105)
WORD
6AH (106) to 6BH (107) 6CH (108) 6DH (109) 6EH (110) 6FH (111)
Reserved for system Error ID Number Error Code Warning ID Number Warning Code Indicates the ID number of the unit having error. Parameter range: 0 to 15 (initial value: 0) Indicates the error code that is happening. Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0) (Unassigned) (Unassigned)
R R R R
UINT UINT UINT UINT
3-33
Instance ID
Attribute ID 70H (112) to 73H (115)
Name
Description
Attribute
Data Type
Reserved for system Indicates the HIGH output (output 1) status of each amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system Indicates the LOW output (output 2) status of each amplifier. When LOW is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system Indicates the GO output (output 3) status of each amplifier. When GO is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system Indicates the status of HH output (output 4) *1 of each amplifier. When HH is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system Indicates the status of LL output (output 5) *1 of each amplifier. When LL is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system
74H (116)
Output1 (HIGH)
WORD
3
75H (117) Output2 (LOW)
WORD
76H (118)
Output3 (GO)
WORD
00H
77H (119)
Output4*1 (HH)
WORD
78H (120)
Output5 (LL)
*1
WORD
79H (121) to 89H (137) 8AH (138)
Reserved for system When the current value 0 of each amplifier is invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system
Current Value 0 Invalid
WORD
8BH (139)
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit Current of the corresponding ID number is turned ON. Value 0 Under Range Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system
WORD
3-34
Instance ID
Attribute ID
Name
Description When the current value 0 of each amplifier is higher than the upper limit of the detection range, the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system When the current value 1 of each amplifier is invalid, the bit of the corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system
Attribute
Data Type
8CH (140)
Current Value 0 Over Range
WORD
8DH (141)
WORD
3
R WORD
8EH (142)
When the current value 1 of each amplifier is less Current than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit Value 1 of the corresponding ID number is turned ON. Under Range Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system Current Value 1 Over Range When the current value 1 of each amplifier is higher than the upper limit of the detection range, the bit of the corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15 Bit15: Reserved for system Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID number 1. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0) : Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor ID number 15. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
8FH (143)
WORD
90H (144) 00H 91H (145) to 9DH (157) 9EH (158) 9FH (159) A0H (160) A1H (161) to ADH (173) AEH (174) AFH (175)
Current Value 0 (ID Number 1)
DINT
DINT
Reserved for system Current Value 1 (ID Number 1) Indicates the current value 1 of the sensor ID number 1. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0) : Indicates the current value 1 of the sensor ID number 15. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
DINT
DINT
Reserved for system
3-35
Instance ID
Attribute ID
Name
Description Set up the condition to determine if the sensor error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error (MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or warning occurs. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Not mask 1: Mask Indicates the number of connected sensor amplifiers. Parameter range: 0 to 15 (initial value: 0)
Attribute
Data Type
B0H (176)
Sensor Status Mask Setting
R/W
UINT
3
00H
B1H (177) B2H (178) to C7H (199) 0300H (768) 0301H (769) to 030EH (782) 030FH (783) 0310H (784) to 04FFH (1279)
Sensor Connected Number*2
UINT
Reserved for system Error Code (ID number 00) : Error Code (ID number 15)
Indicates the error code of ID number 0. Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)
UINT
UINT
Reserved for system
*1 If the sensor amplifier is GT2-71MC*, there is no assigned output. *2 This attribute cannot be used in the GT2-100 Series. The initial value of the effective ID is read irrespective of the effective ID setting.
Reference
For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 3-12).
"Current
3-36
Attributes for GT2 Series (Common to all GT2 Series) Designate the ID number (01H to 0FH) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.
Class Attribute ID 0320H (800) Name Group1 Entry count Description Indicates the number of items (entries) that can be set in Group 1. Parameter range: 9 Indicates the error status of the sensor amplifier. bit0: Overcurrent error (ErC) bit1: Head error (ErH) bit2: EEPROM error (ErE) bit3: Jam check error (Er.chK) bit4: Self-timing delay (Er.dLY) bit5: Number-of-units error (Er.Unit) bit6: Calculation error(Er.CAL) bit7: Calculation-only mode error (Er.noH) Attribute Data Type DINT
0321H (801)
Sensor amplifier error state
DWORD
3
0322H (802) to 0323H (803)
Reserved for system Indicates the control output status. Parameter range: 00H to 1FH (initial value: 00H) bit0: HIGH output bit1: LOW output bit2: GO output bit3: HH output*1 bit4: LL output*1 Indicates the comparator value (P.V. value). Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000) Indicates the raw value (R.V. value). Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000) Indicates the peak-hold value in peak-to-peak mode. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000) Indicates the bottom-hold value in peak-to-peak mode. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000) Indicates the calculation display value. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
Group1
0324H (804)
Control output
DWORD
0325H (805) 0326H (806) 0327H (807)
Comparator value (P.V. Value)*2, *3, *4 Raw value (R.V. Value)

*2, *4, *5
DINT
DINT
Peak value during sampling

*2 , *3, *4, *6
DINT
0328H (808) 0329H (809)
Bottom value during sampling

*2, *3, *4, *6
DINT
Calculation display value*2, *4, *7
DINT
3-37
Class
Attribute ID 032AH (810) to 033FH (831) 0340H (832) 0341H (833) 0342H (834) 0343H (835) 0344H (836) 0345H (837)
Name
Description
Attribute
Data Type
Reserved for system Indicates the number of items (entries) that can be set in Group 2. Parameter range: 20 Indicates the bank 0 HIGH setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 5.0000) Indicates the bank 0 LOW setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000) Indicates the bank 0 preset value. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000) Indicates the bank 0 HH setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 7.0000) Indicates the bank 0 LL setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000) Indicates the bank 1 HIGH setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 5.0000) Indicates the bank 1 LOW setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000) Indicates the bank 1 preset value. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000) Indicates the bank 1 HH setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 7.0000) Indicates the bank 1 LL setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000) Indicates the bank 2 HIGH setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 5.0000) Indicates the bank 2 LOW setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000) Indicates the bank 2 preset value. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
Group2 Entry count Bank 0 HIGH setting Bank 0 LOW setting Bank 0 preset value Bank 0 HH setting*1 Bank 0 LL setting*1 Bank 1 HIGH setting Bank 1 LOW setting Bank 1 preset value Bank 1 HH setting*1 Bank 1 LL setting*1 Bank 2 HIGH setting Bank 2 LOW setting Bank 2 preset value
DINT
3
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
Group2
0346H (838) 0347H (839) 0348H (840) 0349H (841) 034AH (842) 034BH (843) 034CH (844) 034DH (845)
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
3-38
Class
Attribute ID 034EH (846) 034FH (847) 0350H (848) 0351H (849)
Name Bank 2 HH setting*1 Bank 2 LL setting*1 Bank 3 HIGH setting Bank 3 LOW setting Bank 3 preset value Bank 3 HH setting*1 Bank 3 LL setting*1
Description Indicates the bank 2 HH setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 7.0000) Indicates the bank 2 LL setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000) Indicates the bank 3 HIGH setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 5.0000) Indicates the bank 3 LOW setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000) Indicates the bank 3 preset value. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000) Indicates the bank 3 HH setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 7.0000) Indicates the bank 3 LL setting. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)
Attribute
Data Type DINT
R/W
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
3
Group2
0352H (850) 0353H (851) 0354H (852) 0355H (853) to 035FH (863) 0360H (864)
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
Reserved for system Indicates the number of items (number of entries) that can be set in Group 3. Parameter range: 7 Sets key lock. "Lock setting" (Page 3-32) Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0) 0: Unlock 1: Full key lock 2: Key lock Indicates the bank switching. Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0) Indicates the timing status. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) For R (read) 0: The timing input is OFF or measurement is in progress in self-timing mode. 1: The timing input is ON or measurement is not in progress in self-timing mode. For W (write) 0: Change was made during measurement. 1: Change was made during nonmeasurement.
Group3 Entry count
DINT
0361H (865)
Key lock
*8
R/W
DINT
Group3
0362H (866)
Bank switching State*9
R/W
DINT
0363H (867)
Timing status*10
R/W
DINT
3-39
Class
Name
Description
Attribute
Data Type
Reserved for system Indicates bar display mode. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Bar display mode *11 1: OK/NG display mode
Group3
0367H (871) 0368H (872) to 037FH (895) 0380H (896)
Bar display mode*11
R/W
DINT
3
Reserved for system Indicates the number of items (entries) that can be set in Group 4. Parameter range: 29 Indicates calculation mode/calculation setting. Parameter range: 0 to 27 (initial value: 0) Tenth place (calculation mode) 0: Does not use the calculation function. 1: Uses the calculation function. 2: Calculation-only mode Unit digit (calculation setting) 0: Maximum value 1: Minimum value 2: Flatness 3: Average 4: Reference difference 5: Twist 6: Warpage 7: Thickness (If the calculation function is not used, the values written into the calculation setting are invalid.) Indicates detection mode. Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0) 0: Standard 1: NG hold 2: Peak hold 3: Bottom hold 4: Peak-to-peak Indicates the hold update method. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Timing 1: Regular update
Group4 Entry count
DINT
0381H (897)
Calculation mode and Setting*12, *19
R/W
DINT
Group4
0382H (898)
Detection mode
R/W
DINT
0383H (899)
Hold update method
R/W
DINT
3-40
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates the response time. Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 3) 0: hSP (3.0) 1: 5 ms 2: 10 ms 3: 100 ms 4: 500 ms 5: 1000 ms Indicates the timing type. Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0) 0: External timing input 1: Rising edge self-timing 2: Falling edge self-timing Indicates the self timing level. Parameter range: 199.9999 -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.5000) Indicates the self-timing delay type. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Static hold 1: Delay timer Indicates the user-specified delay time. Parameter range: 0 to 9999 (initial value: 1000) Indicates the static hold delay stable determination. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Default 1: User Indicates the static hold delay stable range. Parameter range: 0.0000 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0100) Indicates the measurement increase/decrease direction. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Normal 1: Reversed Indicates the multiplier. Parameter range: 0.1 to 100.0 (Initial value: 1.0) Indicates output mode. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: N.O. 1: N.C. Indicates the display resolution. Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0) 0: 0.0001 1: 0.001 2: 0.01 3: ___0.1
Attribute
Data Type
0384H (900)
Response time*13
R/W
DINT
0385H (901)
Timing type*14
R/W
DINT
3
0386H (902) 0387H (903) 0388H (904) Group4
Self-timing level Self-timing delay type Userspecified delay time Static hold determination
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
0389H (905)
R/W
DINT
038AH (906)
Static hold stable range
R/W
DINT
038BH (907)
Measurement direction
R/W
DINT
038CH (908) 038DH (909)
Multiplier
R/W
DINT
Output mode
R/W
DINT
038EH (910)
Display resolution
R/W
DINT
3-41
Class
Attribute ID 038FH (911) 0390H (912)
Name
Description Indicates the hysteresis. Parameter range: 0.0000 to 199.9999 (Initial value: 0.0030) Indicates the simultaneous input setting. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Individual input 1: Simultaneous input Indicates the special output setting. Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 0) 0: Not used 1: 5-output 2: Limit output 3: Limit output user setting 4: All GO 5: All limit output Indicates the limit output HH position. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.5000) Indicates the limit output LL position. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.5000) Indicates the select preset data. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: R.V. value 1: P.V. value Indicates the preset memory. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: YES 1: NO Indicates the preset point. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Common to all banks 1: Save for each bank
Attribute
Data Type DINT
Hysteresis Simultaneous input setting*12
R/W
R/W
DINT
3
0391H (913)
Special output setting*1, *15
R/W
DINT
0392H (914) 0393H (915) 0394H (916)
Limit output HH position*1 Limit output LL position*1 Select preset data
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
Group4
R/W
DINT
0395H (917)
Preset memory
R/W
DINT
0396H (918)
Preset point
R/W
DINT
0397H (919)
Indicates the power-saving function (ECO). Power-saving Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0) function 0: OFF (ECO) 1: HALF 2: ALL Jam detection function Jam detection position Indicates the jam detection function. Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0) 0: OFF 1: ON 2: USER Indicates the jam detection position. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.5000)
R/W
DINT
0398H (920)
R/W
DINT
0399H (921)
R/W
DINT
3-42
Class
Attribute ID 039AH (922)
Name
Description Indicates the batch setting. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Individual 1: Batch Indicates the analog range setting. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Default 1: Free range setting Indicates the free range setting (Hi). Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 12.0000) Indicates the free range setting (Lo). Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
Attribute
Data Type
Batch setting*16 Analog Range setting*17 Free range setting (Hi)*17 Free range setting (Lo)*17
R/W
DINT
039BH (923) 039CH (924) 039DH (925) 039EH (926) to 039FH (927) 03A0H (928) 03A1H (929) 03A2H (930) to 03AEH (942) 03AFH (943) 03B0H (944) to 03BFH (959)
R/W
DINT
Group4
R/W
DINT
3
R/W
DINT
Reserved for system Indicates the number of items (number of entries) that can be set in Group 5. Parameter range: 15 Indicates the R.V. value of main unit (ID number 1) on which the calculation result was based. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
Group5 Entry count R.V. (base of calc.) ID1

*4, *18
DINT
DINT
: Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID number 15) on which the calculation result was based. Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
Group5
R.V. (base of calc.) ID15

*4, *18
DINT
Reserved for system
3-43
Class
Attribute ID 03C0H (960)
Name Group6 Entry count
Description Indicates the number of items (entries) that can be set in Group 6. Parameter range: 11
Attribute
Data Type DINT
03C1H (961)
3
Indicates the product code. Parameter range: GT2-7*(main unit) : 4006 Product code GT2-7*(expansion unit) : 4007 GT2-71MC* : 4008 GT2-100*(main unit) : 4010 GT2-100*(expansion unit) : 4011 Revision Indicates the revision. Parameter range: 0101H to FFFFH
DINT
03C2H (962) 03C3H (963) to 03C7H (967)
DINT
Reserved for system Indicates the product name. Parameter range: GT2-7*(main unit) : "GT2-71*/75*" GT2-7*(expansion unit) : "GT2-72*/76*" GT2-71MC* : "GT2-71MC*" GT2-100*(main unit) : "GT2-100*" GT2-100*(expansion unit) : "GT2-100*"
03C8H (968) Group6 03C9H (969) to 03D6H (982)
Product name
STRING
Reserved for system Indicates the series code. Parameter range: GT2-7*(main unit) GT2-7*(expansion unit) GT2-71MC* GT2-100*(main unit) GT2-100*(expansion unit)
03D7H (983)
Series code
: 4006 : 4007 : 4008 : 4010 : 4011
DINT
03D8H (984) 03D9H (985) 03DAH (986) to 03DFH (991)
Series version Device type
Indicates the series version. Parameter range: 1 Indicates the device type. Parameter range: 0
R R
DINT DINT
Reserved for system
*1 *2 *3 *4
*5
When GT2-71MC* is used, these cannot be read and written. Use these in combination with the comparator value property (Current Value n Over Range, Current Value n Under Range, Current Value n Invalid). If the calculation function is used and the calculation setting is other than standard difference display, a read error occurs in the expansion unit. If this value is Current Value Over Range, 999.9999 is stored. If this value is Current Value Under Range, -999.9999 is stored. If this value is Current Value Invalid, -999.9998 is stored. If this value is Error, 1000.0000 is stored. For calculation-only mode, a read error occurs in the main unit.
3-44
*6
*7
*8
*9 *10
*11 *12 *13 *14
*15 *16
*17 *18
*19
If the sensor amplifier detection mode is other than peak-to-peak mode, a read error occurs. Using this for discriminating the outer diameter of a cylinder makes it possible to read the peak and bottom values during the measurement period. If the calculation function is not used, a read error occurs. If this value is other than standard difference display, a read error occurs in the expansion unit. If this value is standard difference display, a read error occurs in the main unit. If the key lock function is being used in the main unit when simultaneous input is set, a write error occurs in the expansion unit. If GT2-100* is being used, a write error occurs in other than ID01 (main unit). If the key lock function is being used, a write error occurs. If self-timing is selected, a write error occurs. If simultaneous input is set, a write error occurs in the main unit. If a connection is established with the Assembly instance 65H(101) during cyclic communication, a write error occurs. If the GT2-100* is being used, a write error occurs in other than ID01 (main unit). Read and write are enabled only for the main unit (ID01) If calculation is performed, the expansion unit operates for the response time set in the main unit. The main unit for which peak-to-peak mode, NG hold mode, or calculation-only mode is set operates according to the external timing without reference to the timing type setting. If an unselectable setting is set, a write error occurs. Unselectable settings are saved in EEPROM but not reflected in operation. If the GT2-100* is used, read and write are enabled only for ID01 (main unit). If other than the GT2-100* is used, a read error occurs during reading and a write error occurs during writing. If other than the GT2-71* is used, a read error occurs during reading and a write error occurs during writing. If the calculation function is not used, a read error occurs. If a standard difference display is set for the main unit, a read error occurs. If a standard difference display is set for the expansion unit, a read error occurs in parameters for units other than the main unit (ID01) and the local unit. If other than the standard difference display is set for the expansion unit, a read error occurs. If detection mode is peak-to-peak mode, a read error occurs. If the calculation mode and calculation setting that cannot be set within the current number of connected sensor amplifiers are written, a write error occurs. If the calculation function is used, the sensor amplifiers can hold only the calculated P.V. values. Reading this attribute ID makes it possible to read the R.V. values of each sensor amplifier on which the held calculation results were based. Therefore, the R.V. values of each sensor amplifiers on which the held calculation results were based can be read without being affected by communication response delay.
3
Reference
3-45
Using DL Object
The following describes how to perform message communication with a DL Object. (1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier (2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier (3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier (4) Locking sensor amplifier operations (5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
3
(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 0EH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Description Designates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). Designates the ID number. Designates the attribute ID to be read from "Attribute". There is no service data. Data Example 0EH 67H 0AH 0324H(804) -
Responses (when successful) Item General status Service response data Description A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. The settings of the read parameter are returned. Data Example 00H 0000H
3-46
Responses (when unsuccessful) Item General status Additional status Service response data Description A general status for the service is returned An additional status is returned. There is no service response data. Data Example 16H -
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 3-31) and "Attributes" (Page 3-33).
3
(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier

Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 10H is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Description Designates "Parameter write (10H)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). Designates the ID number. Designates the attribute ID to be written from "Attribute". Writes the setting. Data Example 10H 67H 05H 0347H(839) 0064H
Responses (when successful) Item Description A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. (The written parameters are reflected in the sensor amplifier at the status (00H) return timing.) There is no service response data. Data Example
General status
00H
Service response data
3-47
Responses (when unsuccessful) Item General status Additional status Service response data Description A general status for the service is returned An additional status is returned. There is no service response data. Data Example 0EH -
3
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4BH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command) The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected. The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected. Name Perform preset request Perform preset reset request Reset request Error clear request Initial reset request Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Description Designates the "operation command (4BH)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Designates the ID number. The ID number (00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated. Data Example 4BH 67H 08H Description Executes preset. Executes preset reset. Executes reset. Executes error clear. Resets the value to the initial value. Attribute ID 0301H(769) 0302H(770) 0303H(771) 0304H(772) 0305H(773)
3-48
Item
Description Designates the attribute ID to be designated from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)" (Page 3-48) There is no service response data.
Data Example
Attribute ID
0301H(769)
Service Data
Responses (when successful) Item General status Service response data Description A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. There is no service response data. Data Example 00H -
3
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4CH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data
3-49
Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Description Designates the "batch lock setting (4CH)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Designates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value). There is no data. Designates the batch lock setting. Data Example 4CH 67H 00H 0001H
3
Attribute ID Service Data
Responses (when successful) Item General status Service response data Description Message communication has ended normally. There is no service response data. Data Example 00H -
Point
If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to the DL-EP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensor amplifier are not changed). If the device is key locked, message communication cannot switch the bank.
3-50
(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4DH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Description Designates parameter read (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Designates the ID number. Designates the attribute ID to be read from "Attribute". There is no service data. Data Example 4DH 67H 01H 03A1H (929) -
3
Responses (when successful) Item General status Service response data Description Message communication has ended normally. The read decimal point position is returned. Data Example 00H 04H
3-51
MEMO
3
3-52
Communicating with GT-70A Series
4-1
4-1
4
Scanner
4-2
4-2
Sensor amplifier
Output
EtherNet/IP scanner
DL-EP1
Output
Comparator Value
IN area
Setting value
Comparator Value
External input
OUT area
4
External input
Setting value
IN area
OUT area

X
4-3
4
RPI=5 (ms)* RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)*
RPI=10 (ms)*

Point
Ethernet
4-4
4-3
4
Reference
4-5

The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the DLEP1. [DL-EP1] The DL-EP1 does not require any setting. [Scanner] (1) Set the connection to be used. (2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication. Refer to the scanner manual for details on how to make the above settings. (* No ladder program is required when cyclic communication is used.)
4

Cyclic communication can use the following functions: (1) Read status (2) Read output (Page 4-17) Outputs that can be read: HIGH output, LOW output, GO output (3) Read P.V. value (Page 4-18) (4) Execute external input (Page 4-19) Inputs that can be used: PRESET, TIMING, RESET
4-6
Usable Connections
EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type usable by each device is defined in the EDS file. The DL-EP1 can use the following connections: No Connection Name Input/Output DL-EP1 to scanner Scanner to DL-EP1 DL-EP1 to scanner Scanner to DL-EP1 Assembly Instance 64H (100) 65H (101) 64H (100) FEH (254) Size (Byte) 168 10 168 0 RPI Range (in 0.5 ms) Application Type
Monitor Data 1 And External Input
4
Monitor Data (Input Only)
Reference
4-7

DL-EP1 data
Address 0 Address 1
Scanner IN area
4
Reference
Example)
51 12H
50 34H
49 56H
48 78H
4-8
Name Address (Byte) 0 Status 1 Sensor Error Status Sensor Warning Status Current Value 0 Over Range Current Value 0 Under Range Current Value 0 Invalid Current Value 1 Over Range Current Value 1 Under Range Current Value 1 Invalid Output 1 (HIGH) Output 2 (LOW) Output 3 (GO) Output 4 (Unassigned) Output 5 (Unassigned) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Error Status ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID15 ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 DL-EP1 Error Status Reserved for system ..... ..... ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
4
ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
4-9
Name External Input Response 1 (Preset) External Input Response 2 (Timing) External Input Response 3 (Reset) External Input Response 4 (Unassigned) External Input Response 5 (Unassigned) Error ID Number Error Code Warning ID Number Warning Code
Address (Byte) 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 : 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 : 164 165 166 167
bit6
bit5
bit4 .....
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0 ID01
ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
4
.....
ID09
Current Value 0 (Comparator Value (P.V.) or Raw Value (R.V.))
4-10
Parameter List
Item Description
The error status of the DL-EP1 is output. DL-EP1 Error ON: An error occurred. Status OFF: No error occurred. Warning Status (Unassigned) The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor amplifiers are output. When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0 Error Status is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor amplifiers. OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers. The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is output. Sensor Error Status ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number. OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number. Sensor Warning (Unassigned) Status The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is output. Current Value n ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID Over Range number is greater than the measurement upper limit. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less than the measurement upper limit. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT-70A Series.) The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is output. Current Value n ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less Under Range than the measurement lower limit. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is greater than the measurement lower limit. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT-70A Series.) The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is output. Current Value n ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is Invalid invalid. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is valid (normal). (* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT-70A Series.) The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is output. Output 1: HIGH output Output 2: LOW output Output n (n: 1 to 5) Output 3: GO output Output 4: HH output*1 Output 5: LL output*1 ON: Output n is output. OFF: Output n is not output. An external input response is output when the corresponding external input request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication. External Input The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output. Response ON: The external input request was made (ON). n (n: 1 to 5) OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF). For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-18).
4
4-11
Item
Description If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored. Error priority: (1) DL-EP1 error (2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the highest priority)* * If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error with the smallest ID number has the highest priority. If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored. Error priority: (1) DL-EP1 error (2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the highest priority)* * If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error with the smallest ID number has the highest priority. "Error code list" (Page 4-13) (Unassigned) (Unassigned) The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value 0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value 1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0 to 1) depend on the use conditions. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT-70A Series.) "Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 4-12)
Error ID Number
4
Error Code
Current Value 0/Current Value 1

Name Model Main unit/ expansion unit Main unit Current Value 0 Conditions When calculation mode is OFF When calculation mode is ON (Standard difference) When calculation mode is ON (Standard difference) When calculation mode is ON (Other than standard difference) Function Comparator value (P.V.) Comparator value (P.V.)
Expansion unit
Raw value (R.V.)
Main unit/ expansion unit Current Value 1 Main unit/ expansion unit
Comparator value (P.V.)
(Unassigned)
4-12
51
Unassigned ID error
4
52
0 53
54
Mixed model error
55
56
57
70
4-13
Error ID Number
Code 100 101 102 103 104 150
Actions
4
Error ID Number
151 152
GT-70A Series
Code Description Sensor amplifier error 1 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 2 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 3 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 4 of each ID numbe Sensor amplifier error 5 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 6 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 7 of each ID number Cause Actions
01H
02H
Head error (ErH)
03H 01H to 0FH (Each ID number)
EEPROM error (ErE) Jam check error (Er.ChK) Self-timing delay error (Er.dLY) Number-of-units error (Er.Unit) Calculation error(Er.CAL) Refer to the GT-70A Series User's Manual.
04H
05H
06H
07H
Warning code list No warning code occurs in the DL-EP1 and in the GT-70A Series sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1.
4-14

DL-EP1 data
Scanner's OUT area
Name External Input Request 1 (Preset) External Input Request 2 (Timing) External Input Request 3 (Reset) External Input Request 4 (Error Clear) External Input Request 5 (Unassigned) Address (Byte) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 bit7 ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID15 ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... bit6 bit5 bit4 ..... ..... bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
4
4-15
Parameter List
Name External Input Request 1 External Input Request 2 External Input Request 3 External Input Request 4 Function Preset Operation ON: Executes preset. Executing preset turns on external input response 1. OFF: Turns off external input response 1. ON: Turns on timing. Turning on timing also turns on external input response 2. OFF: Turns off timing. Turning off timing also turns off external input response 2. ON: Executes reset. Executing reset turns on external input response 3. OFF: Turns off external input response 3. (Unassigned)
Timing execution
Reset Request
(Unassigned)
4
External Input Request 5
(Unassigned)
(Unassigned)
4-16

Available outputs: HIGH, LOW, and GO Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H" (Page 4-9)
4
ON OFF
(1)
4-17

Available external inputs: PRESET, TIMING, RESET Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H" (Page 4-15)
PLC External Input request OUT area [2]Bit0 External Input response IN area [30]Bit0 1 0 1 0
(1)
(2)
Sensor amplifier
4
Point
To use the TIMING input, set the "Timing Type" of the sensor amplifier to "External Timing Input". Also, set Input (pink/purple wire) func. 2. to Bank switching B (bank B).
Reference
After the external input is executed, the button operation of the sensor amplifiers is locked for about 10 seconds. "COM-Lock ( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds during switching to the locked state or when an attempt is made to operate a locked button. When button operation is unlocked, "COM-Unlock ( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds. However, the initialization screen appears when an initialization reset is executed. If an external input is repeatedly executed when the initialization screen is being displayed, the initialization screen is retained.
4-18

(2)
4
6789
(1)
4567 5678 7890 8901
This example shows how to read the comparator values from the sensor amplifiers ID01, ID02, and ID03. (1) When the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication. If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -199.9999 to 199.9999. If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is retained without updating the current value. (2) The properties of the comparator value (Current Value n Over Range (each bit of IN area [6]), Current Value n Under Range (each bit of IN area [8]), and Current Value n Invalid (each bit of IN area [10]) are entered. If the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is "over", "under," or "invalid," the bit corresponding to the ID number of that sensor amplifier is set to 1. *For the GT-70A Series, the comparator value is stored in the current value 0.
4-19

4
4-20
4-4
4

Send Receive

Receive Send
Reference
4-21

The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DLEP1. [DL-EP1] The DL-EP1 does not require any setting. [Scanner] Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services" (Page 4-25)
4
Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable commands.

Scanner Command GT-7A DL-EP1
Response: 123456
<Details of command> Service code: 0EH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0325H (805) GT-7A Comparator values (P. V. values): 123456
4-22
Scanner Command: 6000 GT-7A DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 10H Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0399H(921) Service data: 6000 GT-7A jam detection position: 50006000
Response
Scanner Command GT-7A DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 4BH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0301H(769) Preset execution by GT-7A
4
Response
Scanner Command GT-7A DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 4CH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 00H Service data: 01H Changes using the sensor amplifier keys are locked.
Response
4-23
Scanner Command GT-7A DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 4CH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0325H(805) Reads the number of decimal places of the GT-7A comparator value (P.V. value).
Response
4
Reference
For the GT-70A Series, if the current value is 12.53 mm, data is stored as follows: Data: 12530 Number of decimal places: 3
1253012.53012.53mm
Number of decimal places 3 2 1
Point
If message communication writes data to a sensor amplifier, issues an operation command to the sensor amplifier, or locks sensor amplifier operations, the sensor amplifier button operations are locked for about 10 seconds. "COM-Lock ( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds during switching to the locked state or when an attempt is made to operate a locked button. When button operation is unlocked, "COM-Unlock ( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds.
4-24

4
4-25
Reference
4
Command Service Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID* Service data*
Response General Status Additional Status* Service response data*
4-26

EtherNet/IP unit
Command
Response
Object Name
Class ID
Reference Page
4
DL Object
67H
4-31
01H 02H
9-22 9-25
04H
9-26
06H F5H F6H
9-28 9-30 9-34
4-27

The EtherNet/IP scanner and the DL-EP1 exchange Explicit messages for communication. The following provides a basic example of the command format of Explicit messages to be sent and the response format returned from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. Commands Command format
Item Description Designates the service code to be used (Service Code). Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used. Designates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used. Designates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used. Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
4
Service code*1 Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data

4-28
Service check No Yes
Service not Supported (08H) returned as general status
4
4-29

(1) Instance ID (2) Attribute ID (3) Name (4) Description Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is set to ON. Bit 0 to bit 9 ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit 10 to bit 15: Reserved for system (5) Attribute (6) Data Type
00H
74H (116)
Output 1
WORD
4
(5) Attribute
(6) Data type
4-30

Service Code Service Name Description Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service, refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-45). Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service, refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-46). Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier. Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the object. refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)" (Page 4-47). For examples of using this service, refer to "(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-47). Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code 09H is returned as a response. Setting 0: Not lock Setting 1: Key lock "Lock setting" (Page 4-32) For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 4-49). * If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch the bank. Acquisition of the number of decimal places *3 Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-50).
0EH
Parameter read
10H
Parameter write
4
4BH*1
Operation command
4CH
4DH
4-31
Lock setting
Setting Description Does not execute lock. Executes full key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen display switching).
0 1
4
0CH
0EH
10H 13H 14H 16H

-

1FH
FEH
4-32
Attributes
Instance ID Attribute ID Name Description Indicates the status of this unit and connected sensor amplifier. Bit0: DL-EP1 Error Status Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system Bit 14: Warning Status Bit 15: Error Status Indicates the error status of the connected senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned to ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit 10 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned) Attribute Data Type
64H (100)
Status
WORD
65H (101)
Sensor Error Status
WORD
66H (102) 67H (103)
Warning Status
WORD
4
Reserved for system Indicates the status of current value 0 of each amplifier. If the current value 0 is 0ver Range", Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit corresponding to the ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system Indicates the status of current value 1 of each amplifier. If the current value 1 is "0ver Range", "Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit corresponding to the ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit 10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
68H (104)
WORD
00H
69H (105)
WORD
6AH (106) to 6BH (107) 6CH (108) 6DH (109) 6EH (110) 6FH (111) 70H (112) to 73H (115)
R R R R
UINT UINT UINT UINT
Reserved for system Indicates the HIGH output (output 1) status of each amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
74H (116)
Output1 (HIGH)
WORD
4-33
Instance ID
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates the LOW output (output 2) status of each amplifier. When LOW is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system Indicates the GO output (output 3) status of each amplifier. When GO is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned) (Unassigned)
Attribute
Data Type
75H (117)
Output2 (LOW)
WORD
76H (118)
Output3 (GO)
WORD
4
77H (119) 78H (120) 79H (121) to 89H (137) 8AH (138) 00H 8BH (139)
Output4 (Unassigned) Output5 (Unassigned)
R R
WORD WORD
Reserved for system When the current value 0 of each amplifier is invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
WORD
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit Current Value 0 of the corresponding ID number is turned ON. Under Range Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system Current Value 0 Over Range When the current value 0 of each amplifier is higher than the upper limit of the detection range, the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system When the current value 1 of each amplifier is invalid, the bit of the corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
WORD
8CH (140)
WORD
8DH (141)
WORD
8EH (142)
When the current value 1 of each amplifier is less Current than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit Value 1 of the corresponding ID number is turned ON. Under Range Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system Current Value 1 Over Range When the current value 1 of each amplifier is higher than the upper limit of the detection range, the bit of the corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
WORD
8FH (143)
WORD
4-34
Instance ID
Attribute ID 90H (144) 91H (145) to 98H (152) 99H (153) 9AH (154) to 9FH (159) A0H (160) A1H (161) to A8H (168)
Name Current Value 0 (ID Number 1)
Description Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID number 1. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0) : Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor ID number 10. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
Attribute
Data Type
DINT
DINT
Reserved for system Indicates the current value 1 of the sensor ID number 1. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0) : Indicates the current value 1 of the sensor ID number 10. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
4
R DINT
00H
A9H (169) AAH (170) to AFH (175)
DINT
Reserved for system Set up the condition to determine if the sensor error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error (MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or warning occurs. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Not mask 1: Mask Indicates the number of connected sensor amplifiers. Parameter range: 0 to 10 (initial value: 0)
B0H (176)
R/W
UINT
B1H (177) B2H (178) to C7H (199) 0300H (768)
Sensor Connected Number
UINT
Reserved for system Error Code (ID number 00)
UINT
4-35
Instance ID
Name
Description
Attribute
Data Type
00H
030AH (778) 030BH (779) to 04FFH (1279)
Error Code (ID number 10)
UINT
Reserved for system
4
Reference
"Current
4-36
Attributes for GT-70A Series (Common to all GT-70A Series) Designate the ID number (01H to 0AH) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.
Class Attribute ID 0320H (800) Name Group1 Entry count Description Indicates the number of items (entries) that can be set in Group 1. Parameter range: 9 Indicates the error status of the sensor amplifier. bit0: Overcurrent error (ErC) bit1: Head error (ErH) bit2: EEPROM error (ErE) bit3: Jam check error (Er.chK) bit4: Self-timing delay (Er.dLY) bit5: Number-of-units error (Er.Unit) bit6: Calculation error(Er.CAL) Attribute R Data Type DINT
0321H (801)
Sensor amplifier error state*1
DWORD
0322H (802) to 0323H (803) 0324H (804)
Reserved for system Indicates the control output status. Parameter range: 00H to 1FH (initial value: 00H) bit0: HIGH output bit1: LOW output bit2: GO output Indicates the comparator value (P.V. value). Parameter range: -99.9999 to 999.9999 Indicates the raw value (R.V. value). Parameter range: -99.9999 to 999.9999 Indicates the peak value during sampling. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999
4
R DWORD
Group1
Control output*2 Comparator value (P.V. Value)*3, *4, *5 Raw value (R.V. Value)
*3, *4, *5, *6
0325H (805) 0326H (806) 0327H (807)
DINT
DINT
Peak value during sampling

*3, *4, *5, *6, *7
DINT
0328H (808) 0329H (809)
Bottom value during sampling

*3, *4, *5, *6, *8
Indicates the bottom value during sampling. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 Indicates the calculation display value. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999
DINT
Calculation display value*3, *4
DINT
4-37
Class
Attribute ID 032AH (810) to 033FH (831) 0340H (832) 0341H (833) 0342H (834)
Name
Description
Attribute
Data Type
Reserved for system
Group2 Entry count Bank 0 HIGH setting Bank 0 LOW setting Bank 0 preset value Bank 1 HIGH setting Bank 1 LOW setting Bank 1 preset value Bank 2 HIGH setting Bank 2 LOW setting Bank 2 preset value Bank 3 HIGH setting Bank 3 LOW setting Bank 3 preset value
4
0343H (835) 0344H (836) 0345H (837) Group2 0346H (838) 0347H (839) 0348H (840) 0349H (841) 034AH (842) 034BH (843) 034CH (844) 034DH (845) to 035FH (863)
Indicates the number of items (entries) that can be set in Group 2. Parameter range: 12 Indicates the bank 0 HIGH setting. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 5,000) Indicates the bank 0 LOW setting. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 2,000) Indicates the bank 0 preset value. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.000) Indicates the bank 1 HIGH setting. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 5,000) Indicates the bank 1 LOW setting. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 2,000) Indicates the bank 1 preset value. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.000) Indicates the bank 2 HIGH setting. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 5,000) Indicates the bank 2 LOW setting. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 2,000) Indicates the bank 2 preset value. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.000) Indicates the bank 3 HIGH setting. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 5,000) Indicates the bank 3 LOW setting. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 2,000) Indicates the bank 3 preset value. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.000)
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
Reserved for system
4-38
Class
Attribute ID 0360H (864) 0361H (865)
Description Indicates the number of items (number of entries) that can be set in Group 3. Parameter range: 7 Sets key lock. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Unlock 1: Key lock Reads the currently operating bank. Parameter range: 0 to 3 (currently operating bank) Rewrites the operating bank. Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0) 0: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 0. 1: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 1. 2: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 2. 3: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 3. Reads the timing status. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: The timing input is OFF or measurement is in progress in self-timing mode. 1: The timing input is ON or measurement is not in progress in self-timing mode. Writes the timing status. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Change was made during measurement. 1: Change was made during non-measurement.
Attribute R
Data Type DINT
Key lock
R/W
DINT
DINT
0362H (866)
Bank switching state*9
DINT
4
R DINT
Group3 0363H (867) Timing status*10
0364H (868) to 0366H (870) 0367H (871) 0368H (872) to 037FH (895) 0380H (896)
Reserved for system Indicates bar display mode. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Bar display mode 1: OK/NG display mode
Bar display mode
R/W
DINT
Reserved for system Indicates the number of items (entries) that can be set in Group 4. Parameter range: 26 Indicates calculation mode. Parameter range: 0 to 8 (initial value: 0) 0: OFF 1: Maximum value 2: Minimum value 3: Flatness 4: Mean 5: Standard difference 6: Torsion 7: Warp 8: Thickness
Group4 Entry count
DINT
Group4 0381H (897)
Calculation mode and Setting*11, *12
R/W
DINT
4-39
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates detection mode. Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0) 0: Standard 1: NG hold 2: Peak hold 3: Bottom hold 4: Peak-to-peak
Attribute
Data Type
0382H (898)
Detection mode
R/W
DINT
0383H (899)
Reserved for system Indicates the response time. Parameter range: 0 to 6 (initial value: 3) 0: HSP (1.5) 1: 5 ms 2: 10 ms 3: 100 ms 4: 500 ms 5: 1000 ms 6: 5000 ms Indicates the timing type. Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0) 0: External timing input 1: Rising edge self-timing 2: Falling edge self-timing Indicates the self timing level. Parameter range: 199.9999 -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.500) Indicates the self-timing delay type. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Static hold 1: Delay timer Indicates the user-specified delay time. Parameter range: 0 to 9999 (initial value: 1000) Sets the static hold delay stable determination. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Default 1: User Sets the static hold delay stable range. Parameter range: 0.000 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.010) Sets the measurement increase/decrease direction. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Normal 1: Reversed Indicates the multiplier. Parameter range: 0.1 to 100.0 (Initial value: 1.0) Indicates output mode. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: N.O. 1: N.C.
4
0384H (900)
Response time*13
R/W
DINT
0385H (901)
Timing type*14
R/W
DINT
0386H (902) Group4 0387H (903) 0388H (904) 0389H (905) 038AH (906)
Self-timing level Self-timing delay type Userspecified delay time Delay stable determination Delay stable range
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
038BH (907)
R/W
DINT
038CH (908) 038DH (909)
Multiplier
R/W
DINT
Output mode
R/W
DINT
4-40
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Sets the display resolution. Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0) 0:0.001 1:0.01 2:0.1 3:1 Sets the hysteresis. Parameter range: 0.000 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.003) Sets input (purple wire) func. 1. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Bank A 1: Reset Sets input (pink/purple wire) func. 2. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Timing input 1: Bank B
Attribute
Data Type
038EH (910)
Display resolution
R/W
DINT
038FH (911) 0390H (912)
Hysteresis
R/W
DINT
Input (purple wire) func. 1 Input (pink/ purple wire) func. 2
R/W
DINT
0391H (913) 0392H (914) to 0394H (916) 0395H (917) Group4 0396H (918) 0397H (919)
R/W
DINT
4
Reserved for system Set up store preset value. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0:YES 1:NO
Store preset value
R/W
DINT
Reserved for system Power save (eco) function Set up power save (eco) function. Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0) 0:OFF 1:HALF 2:ALL Set up core alarm. Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0) 0:OFF 1:ON 2:USER Set up check point setting. Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.500) Set up display filter function. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0:ON 1:OFF
R/W
DINT
0398H (920)
Core alarm
R/W
DINT
0399H (921) 039AH (922) 039BH (923) to 039FH (927)
Check point setting Display filter function
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
Reserved for system
4-41
Class
Attribute ID 03A0H (928) 03A1H (929)
Name Group5 Entry count R.V. (base of calc.) ID1

*4, *15
Description Indicates the number of items (number of entries) that can be set in Group 5. Parameter range: 10 Indicates the R.V. value of main unit (ID number 1) on which the calculation result was based. Parameter range: -999.999 to 1000.000 Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID number 2) on which the calculation result was based. Parameter range: -999.999 to 1000.000 Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID number 3) on which the calculation result was based. Parameter range: -999.999 to 1000.000 Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID number 4) on which the calculation result was based. Parameter range: -999.999 to 1000.000 Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID number 5) on which the calculation result was based. Parameter range: -999.999 to 1000.000 Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID number 6) on which the calculation result was based. Parameter range: -999.999 to 1000.000 Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID number 7) on which the calculation result was based. Parameter range: -999.999 to 1000.000 Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID number 8) on which the calculation result was based. Parameter range: -999.999 to 1000.000 Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID number 9) on which the calculation result was based. Parameter range: -999.999 to 1000.000 Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID number 10) on which the calculation result was based. Parameter range: -999.999 to 1000.000
Attribute R
Data Type DINT
DINT
03A2H (930)

*4, *15
DINT
4
03A3H (931)

*4, *15
DINT
03A4H (932)

*4, *15
DINT
03A5H (933)

*4, *15
DINT
Group5 03A6H (934)

*4, *15
DINT
03A7H (935)

*4, *15
DINT
03A8H (936)

*4, *15
DINT
03A9H (937)

*4, *15
DINT
03AAH (938) 03ABH (939) to 03BFH (959)

*4, *15
DINT
Reserved for system
4-42
Class
Attribute ID 03C0H (960) 03C1H (961) 03C2H (962) 03C3H (963) to 03C7H (967) 03C8H (968)
Description
Attribute R
Data Type DINT
Indicates the number of items (entries) that can be set in Group 6. Parameter range: 11 Indicates the product code. Parameter range: Product code Main unit : 4000 Expansion unit : 4001 Indicates the revision. Revision Parameter range: 0101H to FFFFH Reserved for system Indicates the product name. Parameter range: Main unit : "GT-71A*/75A* " Expansion unit : "GT-72A*/76A* "
DINT
DINT
Product name
STRING
4
Group6 03C9H (969) to 03D6H (982) 03D7H (983) 03D8H (984) 03D9H (985) 03DAH (986) to 03DFH (991)
Reserved for system Indicates the series code. Parameter range: Main unit : 4000 Expansion unit : 4001 Indicates the series version. Parameter range: 1 Indicates the device type. Parameter range: 0
Series code
DINT
Series version Device type
R R
DINT DINT
Reserved for system
*1
*2 *3 *4
*5
You can check the error contents of the sensor amplifier according to the ON/ OFF status of each bit. OFF(0): No error occurred. ON(1): An error occurred. Two or more errors may simultaneously occur. For details on each error, refer to "GT-70A Series User's Manual". You can check the detailed output status according to the ON/OFF status of each bit. Use this attribute in combination with the comparator value property or comparator value information (invalid/over/under). If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -99.9999 to 999.9999. If this value is Current Value Over Range, 999.9999 is stored. If this value is Current Value Under Range, -999.9999 is stored. If this value is Current Value Invalid, -999.9998 is stored. If this value is Error, 1000.0000 is stored. If this value is other than standard difference display, a read error occurs in the expansion unit. For calculation-only mode, a read error occurs in the main unit.
4-43
*6 *7 *8 *9 *10
*11 *12
4
*13 *14
*15
If the sensor amplifier detection mode is other than peak-to-peak mode, a read error occurs. Using this for discriminating the outer diameter of a cylinder makes it possible to read the peak and bottom values during the measurement period. If the calculation function is not used, a read error occurs. If the key lock function is being used, a write error occurs. The timing status can be written only when the sensor amplifier setting satisfies the following two conditions: - The external timing function is selected as the timing type. - Bank switching B (bank B) is selected as Input (pink/purple wire) func. 2. Read and write are enabled only for the main unit (ID01) If the settings cannot be used with the current number of sensor amplifiers, a write error occurs. If calculation is performed, the expansion unit operates for the response time set in the main unit. The main unit for which peak-to-peak mode, NG hold mode, or calculation-only mode is set operates according to the external timing without reference to the timing type setting. This attribute can be used only when the calculation function is used. If the calculation setting is other than standard difference display, this attribute is valid only for the main unit (ID01). Message communication reads the R.V. value of each of the expansion units (ID01 to ID09) used for calculation from the main unit. If the calculation setting is standard difference display, this attribute is valid only for expansion units. Message communication reads the R.V. value of each expansion unit and the R.V. value of the main unit.
Reference
If the calculation function is used, the sensor amplifiers can hold only the calculated P.V. values. Check the R.V. value of each sensor amplifier on which the calculation results were based using R.V. (base of calc.).
4-44
Using DL Object

4
4-45
4

General status
00H
4-46

Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4BH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command) The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected. The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected. Name Description Attribute ID 0301H(769) 0302H(770) 0303H(771) 0304H(772)
4
Perform preset request Executes preset. Perform preset reset request Executes preset reset. Reset request Executes reset. Clears the jam check error (Er.Chk) Error clear request and self-timing delay error (Er.dLY). Restores all the settings* to the default settings. The span adjustment results set in proofreading setting are not initialized.
Initial reset request
0305H(773)
4-47
Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Description Designates the "operation command (4BH)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Designates the ID number. The ID number (00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated. Designates the attribute ID to be designated from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)" (Page 4-47) There is no service response data. Data Example 4BH 67H 08H
Attribute ID
0301H(769)
4
Service Data
4-48

Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4CH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Description Designates the "batch lock setting (4CH)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Designates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value). There is no data. Designates the batch lock setting. Data Example 4CH Communicating with GT-70A Series 67H 00H 0001H
Point
4-49
Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4DH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Commands
4
Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data
Description Designates parameter read (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Designates the ID number. Designates the attribute ID to be read from "Attribute". There is no service data.
Data Example 4DH 67H 01H 03A1H (929) -
4-50
Communicating with IG Series
5-1
5-1
EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.). Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as EtherNet/IP (Industrial Protocol). Communication is realized by combining the protocols known as Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) with TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used together with the network. Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the side to be opened is called the "adaptor". (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)
5
EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and receives data periodically. Message communication (Explicit messaging) which sends and receives commands and responses at a time specified by the user. Cyclic communication enables you to set RPI (Requested Packet Interval) according to the priority of the data to be exchanged, allowing the entire communication load to be adjusted for data exchange. Message communication enables you to exchange the required commands and responses at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor settings.
Scanner
5-2
5-2
Sensor amplifier
Output
EtherNet/IP scanner
DL-EP1
Output
Comparator Value
IN area
Setting value
Comparator Value
OUT area
External input
IN area
5
OUT area

X
5-3
RPI=10 (ms)* RPI=5 (ms)*
5
Point
RPI=3 (ms)*
RPI=0.5 (ms)*
Ethernet
5-4
5-3
5
Reference
5-5

5

Cyclic communication can use the following functions: (1) Read status (2) Read output (Page 5-17) Outputs that can be read: HIGH output, LOW output, GO output, edge check output (3) Read P.V. value (Page 5-18) (4) Execute external input (Page 5-19) Inputs that can be used: Zero shift, timing, reset, standard waveform registration, laser emission stop
5-6
Usable Connections
Monitor Data 1 And External Input*1
Monitor Data (Input Only)*1
5
Reference
5-7

DL-EP1 data
Address 0 Address 1
Scanner IN area
5
Reference
Example)
51 12H
50 34H
49 56H
48 78H
5-8
Name Address (Byte) 0 Status 1 Sensor Error Status Sensor Warning Status Current Value 0 Over Range Current Value 0 Under Range Current Value 0 Invalid Current Value 1 Over Range Current Value 1 Under Range Current Value 1 Invalid Output 1 (HIGH) Output 2 (LOW) Output 3 (GO) Output 4 (Edge check) Output 5 (Unassigned) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Error Status ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID15 ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 DL-EP1 Error Status Reserved for system ..... ..... ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
5
5-9
Name External Input Response 1 (Zero shift) External Input Response 2 (Timing) External Input Response 3 (Preset) External Input Response 4 (Standard waveform) External Input Response 5 (Laser emission stop) Error ID Number Error Code Warning ID Number Warning Code
Address (Byte) 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 : 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 : 164 165 166 167
bit6
bit5
bit4 .....
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0 ID01
ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
5
.....
ID09
Current Value 0 (P.V. value)
5-10
Parameter List
Item Description
The error status of the DL-EP1 is output. DL-EP1 Error ON: An error occurred. Status OFF: No error occurred. Warning Status (Unassigned) The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor amplifiers are output. When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0 Error Status is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor amplifiers. OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers. The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is output. Sensor Error Status ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number. OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number. Sensor Warning (Unassigned) Status The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is output. Current Value n ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID Over Range number is greater than the measurement upper limit. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less than the measurement upper limit. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the IG Series.) The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is output. Current Value n ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less Under Range than the measurement lower limit. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is greater than the measurement lower limit. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the IG Series.) The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is output. Current Value n ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is Invalid invalid. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is valid (normal). (* The current value 1 does not exist in the IG Series.) The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is output. Output 1: HIGH output Output 2: LOW output Output n (n: 1 to 5) Output 3: GO output Output 4: Edge check output Output 5: (Unassigned) ON: Output n is output. OFF: Output n is not output. An external input response is output when the corresponding external input request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication. External Input The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output. Response ON: The external input request was made (ON). n (n: 1 to 5) OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF). For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-18).
5
5-11
Item
Description If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored. Error priority: (1) DL-EP1 error (2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the highest priority)* * If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error with the smallest ID number has the highest priority. If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored. Error priority: (1) DL-EP1 error (2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the highest priority)* * If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error with the smallest ID number has the highest priority. "Error code list" (Page 5-13) (Unassigned) (Unassigned) The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value 0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value 1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0 to 1) depend on the use conditions. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the IG Series.) "Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 5-12)
Error ID Number
Error Code
5

Name Current Value 0 Current Value 1 Model Main unit/ expansion unit Main unit/ expansion unit Conditions P.V. value (Unassigned) Function
5-12
51
Unassigned ID error
5
52
0 53
54
Mixed model error
55
56
57
70
5-13
Error ID Number
Code 100 101 102 103 104 150 151 152
Actions
5
IG Series
Error ID Number Code Description Sensor amplifier error 1 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 2 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 3 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 4 of each ID numbe Sensor amplifier error 5 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 6 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 7 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 8 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 9 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 10 of each ID number Cause Actions
01H
Overcurrent error
02H
EEPROM error
03H
Head error
04H
T/R reverse connection error
01H to 0AH (Each ID number)
05H
Receiver EEPROM error Refer to the IG Series User's Manual. Receiver error
06H
07H
Transmitter error
08H
Transmitter laser error
09H
Model mismatch error Head error (Standard Waveform)
0AH
5-14
Error ID Number
Code
Description Sensor amplifier error 11 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 12 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 13 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 14 of each ID number
Cause
Actions
0BH
Standard waveform error 1-4
01H to 0AH (Each ID number)
0CH
Communication error Refer to the IG Series User's Manual. Additional setting error
0DH
0EH
Calculation error
Warning code list No warning code occurs in the DL-EP1 and in the IG Series sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1.
5

DL-EP1 data
Scanner's OUT area
Name External Input Request 1 (Zero shift) External Input Request 2 (Timing) External Input Request 3 (Reset) Address (Byte) 0 1 2 3 4 5 bit7 ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID15 ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... bit6 bit5 bit4 ..... ..... bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
5-15
Name External Input Request 4 (standard waveform) External Input Request 5 (Laser emission stop)
Address (Byte) 6 7 8
bit7 ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system
bit6
bit5
bit4 .....
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0 ID01
ID15 .....
.....
ID09 ID01
ID15
.....
ID09
Parameter List
Name External Input Request 1 Function Zero shift Operation ON: Executes zero shift. Executing zero shift turns on external input response 1. OFF: Turns off external input response 1. ON: Turns on timing. Turning on timing also turns on external input response 2. OFF: Turns off timing. Turning off timing also turns off external input response 2. ON: Executes reset. Executing reset turns on external input response 3. OFF: Turns off external input response 3. ON: Registers the standard waveform (gain adjustment). Registering the standard waveform (gain adjustment) turns on external input response 4. OFF: Turns off external input response 4. ON: Stops laser emission. Stopping laser emission turns on external input response 5. OFF: Emits laser. Emitting laser turns off external input response 5.
5
External Input Request 2 External Input Request 3 External Input Request 4 External Input Request 5
Timing execution
Reset Request Registering the standard waveform Laser emission stop
5-16

Available outputs: HIGH, LOW, GO, and edge check Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H" (Page 5-9)
5
(1)
ON OFF
5-17

Available external inputs: Zero shift, timing, reset, standard waveform, laser emission stop Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H" (Page 5-15)
(1)
(2)
Sensor amplifier External Input Timing input 2 to ID 01
ON OFF
5
Point
If the external input or input signal line from cyclic communication is ON, the sensor amplifier recognizes that the external input is ON and executes timing input or laser transmission stop input.
5-18

(2)
(1)
4567 5678 7890 8901 6789
5
This example shows how to read the comparator values from the sensor amplifiers ID01, ID02, and ID03. (1) When the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication. * If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -99.997 to +99.998. If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is retained without updating the current value. (2) The properties of the comparator value (Current Value n Over Range (each bit of IN area [6]), Current Value n Under Range (each bit of IN area [8]), and Current Value n Invalid (each bit of IN area [10]) are entered. If the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is "over", "under," or "invalid," the bit corresponding to the ID number of that sensor amplifier is set to 1. * For the IG Series, the comparator value is stored in the current value 0.
5-19

5
5-20
5-4

Send Receive
5
Receive
Send
Reference
5-21

The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DLEP1. [DL-EP1] The DL-EP1 does not require any setting. [Scanner] Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services" (Page 5-25) Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable commands.
5

Scanner Command IG DL-EP1
Response: 12345
<Details of command> Service code: 0EH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0325H (805) IG Comparator values (P. V. values): 12345
5-22
Scanner Command: 500 IG DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 10H Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0389H(905) Service data: 500 IG Auto hold trigger level: 100500
Response
5
Response
<Details of command> Service code: 4BH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0301H(769) Zero shift execution by IG
Scanner Command IG DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 4CH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 00H Service data: 01H Changes using the sensor amplifier keys are locked.
Response
5-23
Response
<Details of command> Service code: 4CH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0325H(805) Reads the number of decimal places of the IG comparator value (P.V. value).
5
Reference
For the IG Series, if the current value is 12.53 mm, data is stored as follows: Data: 12530 Number of decimal places: 3
1253012.53012.53mm
Number of decimal places 3 2 1
5-24

5
Attribute : ID: 0324H Output ID: 0325H P.V. value ID: 0326H R.V. value :
5-25
Reference
Command Service Response General Status Additional Status* Service response data*
5
Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID* Service data*
5-26

EtherNet/IP unit
Command
Response
Object Name
Class ID
Reference Page
DL Object
67H
5-31
5
01H 02H
9-22 9-25
04H
9-26
06H F5H F6H
9-28 9-30 9-34
5-27

Item Service code*1 Class ID Instance ID Description Designates the service code to be used (Service Code). Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used. Designates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used. Designates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used. Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
5
Attribute ID Service Data

5-28
5
5-29

(1) Instance ID (2) Attribute ID (3) Name (4) Description Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is set to ON. Bit 0 to bit 3 ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system (5) Attribute (6) Data Type
00H
74H (116)
Output 1
WORD
Item
Description Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation. Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation. (* The parameter number 500 is the calculation function (attribute ID0381H(897).) Represents the attribute name. Describes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of parameters that can be set. Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID. R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single, Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value. W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used to write the attribute value. Represents the attribute data type.
5
(1) Instance ID (2) Attribute ID (3) Name (4) Description
(5) Attribute
(6) Data type
5-30

Service Code Service Name Description Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service, refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-52). Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service, refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-53). Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier. Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the object. refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)" (Page 5-55). For examples of using this service, refer to "(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-54). Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code 09H is returned as a response. Setting 0: Not lock Setting 1: Key lock "Lock setting" (Page 5-32) For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 5-57). * If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch the bank. Acquisition of the number of decimal places *3 Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-58).
0EH
Parameter read
10H
Parameter write
5
4BH*1
Operation command
4CH
4DH
5-31
Lock setting
Setting Description Does not execute lock. Executes key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen display switching and [RESET] button).
0 1
General Status Command Type Description (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Normal end The instance ID is out of range. The designated instance ID does not support this service or cannot be executed. The written data is out of range. Parameter write was executed for the function controlled by cyclic communication. An attempt to execute the operation command has failed. Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation command. An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the unwritable status. The written data is out of range. An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the unreadable status. The service data size is less than the defined size. The defined data size is stored in the additional status. The attribute ID is out of range. The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated instance ID is not connected. This service is supported by the designated instance ID but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID. (Additional status: C350H) In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be written into the parameter. (Additional status: C351H) The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional status: C352H) System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
5
00H 05H 08H 09H
0CH
0EH
10H 13H 14H 16H

-

1FH
FEH
5-32
Attributes
Instance ID Attribute ID Name Description Indicates the status of this unit and connected sensor amplifier. Bit0: DL-EP1 Error Status Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system Bit14: Warning Status Bit15: Error Status Indicates the error status of the connected senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned to ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned) Attribute Data Type
64H (100)
Status
WORD
65H (101)
Sensor Error Status
WORD
66H (102) 67H (103)
Warning Status
WORD
Reserved for system Indicates the status of current value 0 of each amplifier. If the current value 0 is 0ver Range", Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit corresponding to the ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned)
68H (104)
Current Value 0 Property Current Value 1 Property
5
R WORD
00H
69H (105) 6AH (106) to 6BH (107) 6CH (108) 6DH (109) 6EH (110) 6FH (111) 70H (112) to 73H (115)
WORD
R R R R
UINT UINT UINT UINT
Reserved for system Indicates the HIGH output (output 1) status of each amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
74H (116)
Output1 (HIGH)
WORD
5-33
Instance ID
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates the LOW output (output 2) status of each amplifier. When LOW is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system Indicates the GO output (output 3) status of each amplifier. When GO is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system Indicates the status of HH output (output 4) *1 of each amplifier. When HH is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned)
Attribute
Data Type
75H (117)
Output2 (LOW)
WORD
76H (118)
Output3 (GO)
WORD
77H (119)
Output4 (edge check)
WORD
5
00H
78H (120) 79H (121) to 89H (137) 8AH (138)
Output5 (Unassigned)
WORD
Reserved for system When the current value 0 of each amplifier is invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
WORD
8BH (139)
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit Current of the corresponding ID number is turned ON. Value 0 Under Range Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system Current Value 0 Over Range Current Value 1 Invalid When the current value 0 of each amplifier is higher than the upper limit of the detection range, the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned)
WORD
8CH (140)
WORD
8DH (141) 8EH (142) 8FH (143) 90H (144)
WORD
Current Value 1 (Unassigned) Under Range Current Value 1 Over Range Current Value 0 (ID Number 1) (Unassigned) Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID number 1. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
WORD
WORD
DINT
5-34
Instance ID
Attribute ID 91H (145) to 92H (146) 93H (147) 94H (148) to 9EH (158) 9FH (159) A0H (160) to AEH (174) AFH (175)
Name
Description
Attribute
Data Type
: Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID number 4. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
Current Value 0 (ID Number 4) Current Value 0 (ID Number 1) to (ID Number 15)
WORD
(Unassigned)
DINT
Reserved for system Current Value 1 (ID Number 1) to (ID Number 15)
(Unassigned)
DINT
5
Set up the condition to determine if the sensor error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error (MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or warning occurs. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Not mask 1: Mask Indicates the number of connected sensor amplifiers. Parameter range: 0 to 15 (initial value: 0) R/W UINT
Reserved for system
00H B0H (176)
B1H (177) B2H (178) to C7H (199) 0300H (768) 0301H (769) to 0303H (771) 0304H (772)
UINT
UINT
Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID number 4. Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)
UINT
5-35
Instance ID
Attribute ID 0305H (773) to 030FH (783) 0310H (784) to 04FFH (1279)
Name Error Code (ID number 5) to (ID number 15)
Description
Attribute
Data Type
(Unassigned)
UINT
00H
Reserved for system
Reference
"Current
5
5-36
Attributes for IG Series Designate the ID number (01H to 04H) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.
Class Attribute ID 0320H (800) Name Group1 Entry count Description Indicates the number of items (entries) that can be set in Group 1. Parameter range: 29 Indicates the error status of the sensor amplifier. Bit0 : Overcurrent error Bit1 : EEPROM error Bit2 : Head error Bit3 : T/R reverse connection error Bit4 : Receiver EEPROM error Bit5 : Receiver error Bit6 : Transmitter error Bit7 : Transmitter laser error Bit8 : Model mismatch error Bit9 : Head error (standard waveform) Bit10 : Standard waveform error 1-4 Bit11 : Communication error Bit12 : Additional setting error Bit13 : Calculation error Attribute Data Type DINT
0321H (801)
DWORD
5
0322H (802) to 0323H (803)
Reserved for system
Group1
0324H (804)
Judgment / Edge check output*2
Indicates the judgement/edge check output. Parameter range: 00H to 0FH Bit0: HIGH judgement output Bit1: LOW judgement output Bit2: GO judgement output Bit3: Edge check output Indicates the comparator value (P.V. value). Parameter range: -199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000) Indicates R.V. value. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates the peak hold value. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates the bottom hold value. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates the calculation value (CALC value). Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates the analog output value. Parameter range: -5.000 to +5,000
DWORD
0325H (805) 0326H (806) 0327H (807) 0328H (808) 0329H (809) 032AH (810) 032BH (811) to 032CH (812)
P.V. value
*3, *4, *5
R R R
DINT DINT DINT
R.V. value
*4, *5
Peak hold value

*4, *5, *6 *29
Bottom hold value

*4, *5, *6 *29
DINT
Calculation value (CALC value)

*4, *5, *7
DINT
Analog output value

*7, *8, *9
DINT
(Reserved for system)
5-37
Class
Attribute ID 032DH (813) 032EH (814) 032FH (815) to 0332H (818) 0333H (819) 0334H (820)
Name Number of edges*10 Optical axis alignment state
Description Indicates the number of edges. Parameter range: 0 to 99 Indicates the optical axis alignment state. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Optical axis alignment NG 1: Optical axis alignment OK
Attribute R
Data Type DINT
DINT
Abnormal setting*11
Indicates the abnormal setting. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Normal setting 1: Abnormal setting
DINT
(Reserved for system) EEPROM writing result*12 Indicates the EEPROM writing result. Parameter range: 0 to 2 0: Writing 1: Normal end 2: Writing failure Indicates the zero shift and zero shift reset execution result. Parameter range: 0 to 2 0: Executing 1: Normal end 2: Execution impossible Indicates the reset request results. Parameter range: 0 to 2 0: Executing 1: Normal end 2: Execution impossible Indicates the system parameter current state. Parameter range: Main unit : 0 to 9 (initial value: 0) Expansion unit : 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
5
Group1
0335H (821)
DINT
0336H (822)
Zero shift execution result*13
DINT
0337H (823)
Reset request result System parameter current state*14
DINT
0338H (824) 0339H (825)
DINT
(Reserved for system) Indicates the waveform registration result. Parameter range: 0 to 7 0: Executing request 1: Normal end 2: Standard waveform error 1 3: Standard waveform error 2 4: Standard waveform error 3 5: Receiver EEPROM error 6: Standard waveform error 4 7: Errors other than the above
033AH (826)
Waveform registration result
DINT
033BH (827)
5-38
Class
Attribute ID
Name Tolerance/ 2point turning result*15
Description Indicates the tolerance/2point tuning result. Parameter range: 0 to 2 0: Executing request 1: Normal end 2: Execution impossible Indicates the calibration execution result. Parameter range: 0 to 4 0: Executing 1: Normal end 2: Span value abnormal termination 3: Offset abnormal termination 4: Span value/Offset value abnormal
Attribute
Data Type
033CH (828)
DINT
Group1
033DH (829)
Calibration execution result*16
DINT
033EH (830) to 033FH (831) 0340H (832) 0341H (833) 0342H (834) 0343H (835)
Group2 Entry count HIGH setting value (BANK 0)*17 LOW setting value (BANK 0)*17 Shift target value (BANK 0)*17 Sensitivity setting (BANK 0) User binarize level (BANK 0) User filter value (BANK 0) HIGH setting value (BANK 1)*17 LOW setting value (BANK 1)*17 Shift target value (BANK 1)*17
Indicates the group 2 entry count. Parameter range: 24 Indicates the HIGH setting value (BANK 0). Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 8,000) Indicates the LOW setting value (BANK 0). Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 2,000) Indicates the shift target value (BANK 0). Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000) Indicates the sensitivity setting (BANK 0). Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 1) 0: Low sensitivity mode 1: Standard mode 2: High sensitivity mode 3: User Indicates the user binarize level (BANK 0). Parameter range: 10 to 90 (initial value: 25) Indicates the user filter value (BANK 0). Parameter range: 3 to 50 (initial value: 9) Indicates the HIGH setting value (BANK 1). Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 8,000) Indicates the LOW setting value (BANK 1). Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 2,000) Indicates the shift target value (BANK 1). Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R R/W
DINT DINT
5
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
0344H (836) Group2 0345H (837) 0346H (838) 0347H (839) 0348H (840) 0349H (841)
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
5-39
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates the sensitivity setting (BANK 1). Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 1) 0: Low sensitivity mode 1: Standard mode 2: High sensitivity mode 3: User Indicates the user binarize level (BANK 1). Parameter range: 10 to 90 (initial value: 25) Indicates the user filter value (BANK 1). Parameter range: 3 to 50 (initial value: 9) Indicates the HIGH setting value (BANK 2). Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 8,000) Indicates the LOW setting value (BANK 2). Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 2,000) Indicates the shift target value (BANK 2). Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000) Indicates the sensitivity setting (BANK 2). Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 1) 0: Low sensitivity mode 1: Standard mode 2: High sensitivity mode 3: User Indicates the user binarize level (BANK 2). Parameter range: 10 to 90 (initial value: 25) Indicates the user filter value (BANK 2). Parameter range: 3 to 50 (initial value: 9) Indicates the HIGH setting value (BANK 3). Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 8,000) Indicates the LOW setting value (BANK 3). Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 2,000) Indicates the shift target value (BANK 3). Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value:0.000) Indicates the sensitivity setting (BANK 3). Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 1) 0: Low sensitivity mode 1: Standard mode 2: High sensitivity mode 3: User Indicates the user binarize level (BANK 3). Parameter range: 10 to 90 (initial value: 25)
Attribute
Data Type
034AH (842)
Sensitivity setting (BANK 1) User binarize level (BANK 1) User filter value (BANK 1) HIGH setting value (BANK 2)*17 LOW setting value (BANK 2)*17 Shift target value (BANK 2)*17 Sensitivity setting (BANK 2) User binarize level (BANK 2) User filter value (BANK 2) HIGH setting value (BANK 3)*17 LOW setting value (BANK 3)*17 Shift target value (BANK 3)*17 Sensitivity setting (BANK 3) User binarize level (BANK 3)
R/W
DINT
034BH (843) 034CH (844) 034DH (845) 034EH (846)
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
5
034FH (847)
R/W
DINT
0350H (848) Group2 0351H (849) 0352H (850) 0353H (851) 0354H (852) 0355H (853)
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
0356H (854)
R/W
DINT
0357H (855)
R/W
DINT
5-40
Class
Attribute ID 0358H (856)
Name User filter value (BANK 3)
Description Indicates the user filter value (BANK 3). Parameter range: 3 to 50 (initial value: 9)
Attribute
Data Type DINT
R/W
Group2
0359H (857) to 035FH (863) 0360H (864) 0361H (865)
Group3 Entry count Key lock
Indicates the group 3 entry count. Parameter range: 31 Indicates the key lock. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Not key locked state 1: Key locked state Reads the currently operating bank. Parameter range: 0 to 3 (currently operating bank)
DINT
R/W
DINT
DINT
0362H (866)
Bank function
*18
Rewrites the operating bank. Parameter range: 0 to 3 0: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 0. 1: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 1. 2: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 2. 3: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 3. Indicates the timing input request. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Timing input OFF 1: Timing input ON Indicates the laser emission stop request. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Laser emission 1: Laser emission stop
DINT
5
0363H (867)
Timing input request*19, *20 (Laser emission stop request*19, *20
R/W
DINT
Group3
0364H (868) 0365H (869) to 0367H (863)
R/W
DINT
0368H (872)
Sub display's screen*21
Indicates the sub display's screen. Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 0) 0: R.V. value screen 1: Analog output screen 2: HIGH setting value screen 3: LOW setting value screen 4: Shift target value screen 5: Calculated value display screen Indicates the system parameter. Parameter range: Main unit : 0 to 9 (initial value: 0) Expansion unit : 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) Indicates the tolerance setting width. Parameter range: 0.000 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.100)
R/W
DINT
0369H (873) 036AH (874)
System parameter
*14, *22
R/W
DINT
Tolerance setting width*23
R/W
DINT
5-41
Class
Attribute ID 036BH (875) 036CH (876) 036DH (877) 036EH (878) to 0373H (883) 0374H (884)
Name
Description Indicates the calibration function. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Standard 1: User setting Indicates the calibration function SET1. Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000) Indicates the calibration function SET2. Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 5,000)
Attribute
Data Type
Calibration function Calibration function SET1 Calibration function SET2
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
(Reserved for system) Edge number 1 (BANK 0)*24 Edge number 2 (BANK 0)*24 Number of the pins (BANK 0) Edge number 1 (BANK 1)*24 Edge number 2 (BANK 1)*24 Number of the pins (BANK 1) Edge number 1 (BANK 2)*24 Edge number 2 (BANK 2)*24 Number of the pins (BANK 2) Edge number 1 (BANK 3)*24 Edge number 2 (BANK 3)*24 Indicates specified edges interval measurement mode: Edge number 1 (BANK 0). Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 1) Indicates specified edges interval measurement mode: Edge number 2 (BANK 0). Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 2) Indicates pin interval judgment mode or pin diameter judgment mode: Number of the pins (BANK 0). Parameter range: 2 to 14 (initial value: 2) Indicates specified edges interval measurement mode: Edge number 1 (BANK 1). Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 1) Indicates specified edges interval measurement mode: Edge number 2 (BANK 1). Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 2) Indicates pin interval judgment mode or pin diameter judgment mode: Number of the pins (BANK 1). Parameter range: 2 to 14 (initial value: 2) Indicates specified edges interval measurement mode: Edge number 1 (BANK 2). Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 1) Indicates specified edges interval measurement mode: Edge number 2 (BANK 2). Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 2) Indicates pin interval judgment mode or pin diameter judgment mode: Number of the pins (BANK 2). Parameter range: 2 to 14 (initial value: 2) Indicates specified edges interval measurement mode: Edge number 1 (BANK 3). Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 1) Indicates specified edges interval measurement mode: Edge number 2 (BANK 3). Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 2)
R/W
DINT
5
Group3
0375H (885) 0376H (886) 0377H (887) 0378H (888) 0379H (889) 037AH (890) 037BH (891) 037CH (892) 037DH (893) 037EH (894)
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
5-42
Class
Attribute ID 037FH (895) 0380H (896)
Name Number of the pins (BANK 3) Group4 Entry count
Description Indicates pin interval judgment mode or pin diameter judgment mode: Number of the pins (BANK 3). Parameter range: 2 to 14 (initial value: 2) Indicates the group 4 entry count. Parameter range: 31 Indicates the calculation function. Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0) 0: 0: Not use. 1: Addition mode 2: Subtraction mode 3: 2 heads mode Indicates measurement mode. Parameter range: 0 to 7 (initial value: 0) 0: Edge control/positioning 1: Outer diameter/width 2: Inner diameter/opening 3: Glass edge 4: Pin position 5: Pin interval 6: Pin diameter 7: Specified edges interval Indicates the measurement direction. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Top 1: Bottom
Attribute
Data Type
Group3
R/W
DINT
DINT
0381H (897)
Calculation function*7
R/W
DINT
0382H (898)
Measurement mode
R/W
DINT
5
R/W DINT
0383H (899) Group4 0384H (900)
(Reserved for system) Indicates averaging. Parameter range: 0 to 13 (initial value: 5) 0: hsp 1: 1 2: 2 3: 4 4: 8 5: 16 6: 32 7: 64 8: 128 9: 256 10: 512 11: 1024 12: 2048 13: 4096 Indicates output mode. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: N.O. 1: N.C.
0385H (901)
Averaging*25
R/W
DINT
0386H (902) 0387H (903)
Output mode
R/W
DINT
5-43
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates the hold function setting. Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 0) 0: Sample hold 1: Peak hold 2: Bottom hold 3: Peak-to-peak hold 4: Auto peak hold 5: Auto bottom hold Indicates auto peak hold or auto bottom hold trigger level. Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.100) Indicates timing input. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Level 1: Edge Indicates the delay timer. Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0) 0: Delay timer off 1: On delay timer 2: Off delay timer 3: One shot timer Indicates the timing value. (The unit is ms.) Parameter range: 1 to 9999 (initial value: 60) Indicates the hysteresis. Parameter range: 0 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.020) Indicates the analog output scaling. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Initial state 1: Free range Indicates the analog output upper limit. Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 10,000) Indicates the analog output lower limit. Parameter range: -99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000) Indicates external input. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Initial state 1: User setting Indicates external input 1. Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0) 0: Zero shift input 1: Bank A input 2: Bank B input 3: Laser emission stop input 4: Not use
Attribute
Data Type
0388H (904)
Hold function setting
R/W
DINT
0389H (905)
Auto hold trigger level Timing input
R/W
DINT
038AH (906)
R/W
DINT
5
Group4
038BH (907)
Delay timer
R/W
DINT
038CH (908) 038DH (909) 038EH (910) 038FH (911) 0390H (912) 0391H (913)
Timer value Hysteresis*23 Analog output scalingg*7 Analog output upper limit*7 Analog output lower limit*7 External input*26
R/W R/W
DINT DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
0392H (914)
External input 1*26
R/W
DINT
5-44
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates external input 2. Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0) 0: Reset input 1: Bank A input 2: Bank B input 3: Laser emission stop input 4: Not use Indicates external input 3. Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0) 0: Timing input 1: Bank A input 2: Bank B input 3: Laser emission stop input 4: Not use Indicates external input 4. Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 4) 0: Gain input (standard waveform input) 1: Bank A input 2: Bank B input 3: Laser emission stop input 4: Not use
Attribute
Data Type
0393H (915)
External input 2*26
R/W
DINT
0394H (916)
External input 3*26
R/W
DINT
0395H (917)
External input 4*26
R/W
DINT
5
R/W DINT
0396H (918) 0397H (919)
(Reserved for system) Saving the standard waveform Saving zero shift value function Interference prevention*7 Indicates saving the standard waveform function. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: OFF 1: ON Indicates the saving zero shift value function. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: OFF 1: ON Indicates the interference prevention function. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: OFF 1: ON Indicates the display digit. Parameter range: 1 to 4 (initial value: 2) 1: 0.001 2: 0.01 3: 0.1 4: 1 Indicates the power save function. Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0) 0: OFF 1: Half 2: All Indicates the position monitor. Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0) 0: Initial state 1: OK/NG display mode 2: Red OFF 3: OFF
Group4
0398H (920)
R/W
DINT
0399H (921)
R/W
DINT
039AH (922)
Display digit*27
R/W
DINT
039BH (923)
Power save function
R/W
DINT
039CH (924)
Position monitor
R/W
DINT
5-45
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates the display color. Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0) 0: GO green 1: GO red 2: Always red Indicates the edge check function. Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0) 0: OFF 1: Setting A 2: Setting B Indicates the edge check function number of edges. Parameter range: 0 to 99 (initial value: 1) Indicates the group 5 entry count. Parameter range: 28 Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 1 or pin interval 1. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
Attribute
Data Type
039DH (925)
Display color
R/W
DINT
Group4
039EH (926)
Edge check function Edge check func. number of edges Group5 Entry count P.V. of pin diameter/ interval 1 *4, *28 P.V. of pin diameter/ interval 2
*4, *28
R/W
DINT
039FH (927) 03A0H (928) 03A1H (929)
R/W
DINT
DINT
5
DINT
03A2H (930)
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 2 or pin interval 2. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
DINT
03A3H (931)
P.V. of pin diameter/ interval 3

*4, *28
DINT
03A4H (932)

*4, *28
DINT
Group5
03A5H (933)

*4, *28
DINT
03A6H (934)

*4, *28
DINT
03A7H (935)

*4, *28
DINT
03A8H (936)

*4, *28
DINT
03A9H (937)

*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 9 or pin interval 9. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 10 or pin interval 10. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
DINT
P.V. of pin 03AAH diameter/ (938) interval 10

*4, *28
DINT
5-46
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 11 or pin interval 11. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 12 or pin interval 12. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 13 or pin interval 13. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates the comparator value (P.V. value) of pin diameter 14.. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 1 or pin interval 1. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
Attribute
Data Type
P.V. of pin 03ABH diameter/ (939) interval 11

*4, *28
DINT
P.V. of pin 03ACH diameter/ (940) interval 12

*4, *28
DINT
P.V. of pin 03ADH diameter/ (941) interval 13

*4, *28
DINT
03AEH (942) 03AFH (943)
R.V. of pin diameter 14

*4, *28
DINT
R.V. of pin diameter/ interval 1

*4, *28
DINT
03B0H (944)

*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 2 or pin interval 2. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
DINT
5
03B1H (945) Group5 03B2H (946)

*4, *28
DINT

*4, *28
DINT
03B3H (947)

*4, *28
DINT
03B4H (948)

*4, *28
DINT
03B5H (949)

*4, *28
DINT
03B6H (950)

*4, *28
DINT
03B7H (951)

*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 9 or pin interval 9. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 10 or pin interval 10. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
DINT
03B8H (952)

*4, *28
DINT
5-47
Class
Attribute ID 03B9H (953)
Name R.V. of pin diameter/ interval 11

*4, *28
Description Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 11 or pin interval 11. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 12 or pin interval 12. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 13 or pin interval 13. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000 Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 14. Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
Attribute
Data Type
DINT
R.V. of pin 03BAH diameter/ (954) interval 12

*4, *28
DINT
Group5
R.V. of pin 03BBH diameter/ (955) interval 13

*4, *28
DINT
R.V. of pin 03BCH diameter (956) 14*4, *28
DINT
5
Group6
03BDH (957) (Reserved for system) to 03BFH (959) 03C0H (960) 03C1H (961) 03C2H (962) Group6 Entry count Product code Indicates the group 6 entry count. Parameter range: 11 Indicates the product code. Parameter range: Main unit : 4016 Expansion unit : 4017 Indicates the revision. Parameter range:0101H to FFFFH (initial value: 0101H) Indicates the T connector sensor head. Parameter range: 0 to 9 (initial value: 0) 0: IG-028 transmitter 1: IG-010 transmitter 9: Detection impossible Indicates the R connector sensor head. Parameter range: 0 to 9 (initial value: 0) 0: IG-028 transmitter 1: IG-010 transmitter 9: Detection impossible R DINT
DINT
Revision
DINT
03C3H (963)
T connector sensor head
DINT
03C4H (964) 03C5H (965) to 03C7H (967) 03C8H (968) 03C9H (969) to 03D6H (982) 03D7H (983)
R connector sensor head
DINT
Reserved for system
Product name
Indicates the product name. Main unit : "IG-1000/1500" Expansion unit : "IG-1050/1550"
STRING
Reserved for system
Series code
Indicates the series code. Main unit : 4016 Expansion unit : 4017
DINT
5-48
Class
Attribute ID 03D8H (984) 03D9H (985)
Name Series version Device type
Description Indicates the series version. Parameter range: 1 Indicates the device type. Parameter range: 0
Attribute R R
Data Type DINT DINT
Group6
03DAH (986) Reserved for system to 03DFH (991)
*1
*2 *3 *4
*5 *6
*7 *8 *9 *10 *11
*12 *13
You can check the error contents of the sensor amplifier according to the ON/ OFF status of each bit. OFF(0): No error occurred. ON(1): An error occurred. Two or more errors may simultaneously occur. For details on each error, refer to "IG Series User's Manual". You can check the detailed output status according to the ON/OFF status of each bit. Use this attribute in combination with the comparator value property or comparator value information (invalid/over/under). If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -99.997 to +99.998. If this value is Over Range, +99.999 is stored. If this value is Under Range, -99.999 is stored. If this value is Invalid "----", -99.998 is stored. If this value is Error, +100,000 is stored. If data is read from the main unit for which the calculation function is set to 2 heads mode, the read range varies with -999.99 to +999.99. This attribute can be used only when the detection mode of the sensor amplifier is peak-to-peak hold. Using this for discriminating the outer diameter of a cylinder makes it possible to read the peak and bottom values during the measurement period. If this attribute is used in the expansion unit, a read error occurs. If the sensor amplifier is in Error Status, the analog voltage output becomes +5.500 and the analog current output becomes +3.00. If the analog output is OFF in the main unit, a read error occurs. If the number of edges is greater than or equal to 100, 99 is read. If a write for which a combination of inhibited functions is set is executed, abnormal setting (1) occurs. For details on each error, refer to "IG Series User's Manual". (Example) If settings for using the calculation function are changed when measurement mode is pin interval or pin diameter The results of "initial reset request" and "system parameter set request" for the operation command are also included in this item. The execution result for the lastly requested item of "zero shift execution request" or "zero shift request execution request" is read.
5
5-49
*14
You can check the system parameter of the sensor amplifier by reading "system parameter current state". The system parameter sets a judgement output, edge check output polarity, and analog output. Designate the system parameter set when the operation command executes "system parameter set request" as "system parameter". A read or write value is designated by ON/OFF of each of the bits to be converted to a binary number.
Bit 0 0: NPN output 1: PNP output 000: Analog output OFF 001: 0 to 5V 010: -5 to +5V 011: 1 to 5V 100: 4 to 20mA (Fixed to 000 for expansion unit) Setting
3, 2, 1
5
Reference
When the read data is "6": "6" is converted to "0110" in binary representation.
0110 0
Bits 3, 2, 1: 1 to 5 V Bit 0: NPN output For this reason, the sensor amplifier that read data is set to "NPN output" and "analog output 1 to 5 V". Of "tolerance tuning request", "two-point tuning HIGH side 2nd poiont confirmation", and "two-point tuning LOW side 2nd point confirmation" for the operation command, the execution result for the lastly requested item is read. If calibration is executed when measurement mode is pin interval or pin diameter, the calibration execution result becomes "span value/offset value abnormal". If data is read from the main unit for which the calculation function is set to 2 heads mode, the read range varies with -999.99 to +999.99. Also, if calculation function mode is changed to 2 heads mode from modes other than 2 heads mode, these setting values change to 10 times. If the sensor amplifier is in the key locked state, data cannot be written. If an attempt is made to write data, a write error occurs. If the monitor data/external input connection is already established in cyclic communication, a write error occurs. This attribute operates as OFF only when timing input OFF(0) is written and external input is OFF in wiring. If an attempt is made to write 1 or 5, a write error occurs in the expansion unit. This is reflected in operation when the system parameter set request is executed. If data is read from the main unit for which the calculation function is set to 2 heads mode, the read range varies with 0.00 to 99.99. For -100, "bottom" is set. For +100, "top" is set. If an attempt is made to write 0, a write error occurs.
*15
*16
*17
*18 *19 *20 *21 *22 *23 *24
5-50
*25
*26
*27 *28
*29
If "pin interval" or "pin diameter" is set as measurement mode, hsp(0) and 512(10) to 4096(13) cannot be written. If hsp(0) is written, 1(1) is written. If 512(10) to 4096(13) are written, 256(9) is written. When using the calculation function, do not write any data to the expansion unit 1. Changing averaging of the main unit that is using the calculation function automatically changes averaging of the expansion unit 1. To reflect the written settings in the sensor amplifier, you must write user setting (1) in "external input" or set external input setting to "user setting" in button operation of the sensor amplifier. If the calculation function is set to 2 heads mode, the valid value range is 2 to 4 (if 1 is written, a setting error occurs). If measurement mode is pin interval, the pin interval is read. If measurement mode is pin diameter, the pin diameter is read. Pin diameter (interval) 1 represents the first pin diameter (interval) counted from the top side. If this data is read when measurement mode is other than pin interval or pin diameter, a read error occurs. If this value is read during sample hold, a read error occurs.
5
5-51
Using DL Object

5
5-52

5
General status
00H
5-53

Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4BH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID
Point
5
Before executing the operation command, check that the sensor amplifier can execute the operation command. You can check whether the sensor amplifier can execute the operation command from the read results of attributes for IG Series (zero shift result, zero shift reset execution result, reset request result, system parameter current state, standard waveform request result, tolerance/2point tuning result, calibration execution result). If the read results are normal end (1), it indicates that the sensor amplifier can execute the operation command. Also, check that the executed operation command ends normally.
5-54
Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command) The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected. The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected. Attribute ID Name Description Executes zero shift. Turning off the sensor amplifier after executing zero shift restores the state before the zero shift function is used. If the shift state is retained even after the sensor amplifier is turned off, set the saving zero shift value function to ON. Resets the zero shift value. Executes reset. Initializes all the settings other than the calibration, standard waveform registration, and system parameters of the sensor amplifier. All parameters are stored in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) approx. 3 minutes after the initial reset request is executed. After the initial reset request has been executed, "EEPROM write result" of the attribute for IG Series becomes normal end (1). Changes the contents of the system parameter (judgement output, edge check output polarity, and analog output) to the contents written in "system parameter" of the setting/status command parameter. Change the contents tailored to the connected devices and wiring. If the contents are changed by mistake, the devices connected to the sensor amplifier may go down. Registers the standard waveform. Turning off the sensor amplifier after registering the standard waveform restores the state before the standard waveform is registered. If the standard waveform registration is retained even after the sensor amplifier is turned off, set the saving standard waveform to ON. Executes tolerance tuning. Set the tolerance setting width using the attribute for IG Series "tolerance setting width".
0301H (769)
Zero shift execution request
0302H (770) 0303H (771)
Zero shift reset execution request Reset request
5
0305H (773)
0306H (774)
System parameter set request
039AH (778)
Standard waveform registration request
030EH (782)
Tolerance tuning request
5-55
Attribute ID 030FH (783)
Name Two-point tuning HIGH side 1st point confirmation operation request Two-point tuning HIGH side 2nd point confirmation operation request (determine HIGH setting value.) Two-point tuning LOW side 1st point confirmation operation request Two-point tuning LOW side 2nd point confirmation operation request (determine LOW setting value) Calibration SET 1 confirmation operation request Calibration SET 2 confirmation operation request (Perform calibration.)
Description
0310H (784)
0311H (785)
Executes two-point tuning. For details on the two-point tuning execution procedure, refer to "IG Series User's Manual".
5
0312H (786)
0313H (787) 0314H (788)
Executes calibration. Set the R.V. value that you want to display using the attribute for IG Series "Calibration function SET1" or "Calibration function SET2". For details on the two-point tuning execution procedure, refer to "IG Series User's Manual".
Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Description Designates the "operation command (4BH)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Designates the ID number. The ID number (00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated. Designates the attribute ID to be designated from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)" (Page 5-55) There is no service data. Data Example 4BH 67H 08H
Attribute ID
0301H(769)
Service Data
5-56
5

Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4CH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Description Designates the "batch lock setting (4CH)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Designates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value). There is no data. Designates the batch lock setting. Data Example 4CH 67H 00H 0001H
5-57
5
Point
Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4DH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Description Designates parameter read (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Designates the ID number. Designates the attribute ID to be read from "Attribute". There is no service data. Data Example 4DH 67H 01H 03A1H (929) -
5-58
5
5-59
MEMO
5
5-60
Communicating with IB Series
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart.
6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4
What is EtherNet/IP?.......................................... 6-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ... 6-3 Cyclic communication......................................... 6-5 Message Communication ................................. 6-22
6-1
6-1
6
Scanner
6-2
6-2
Sensor amplifier
Output
EtherNet/IP scanner
DL-EP1
Output
Comparator Value
IN area
Setting value
Comparator Value
OUT area
External input
IN area
OUT area
6

The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions:
Communication Methods Function of sensor amplifier Read status Read output Read current value Execute external input Change bank number Rewrite setting value Motion command Read current value, setting, and status Read number of decimal places Rewrite setting value Lock all Cyclic communication (Page 6-5) Message Communication (Page 6-22)
X
6-3
6
Point
6-4
6-3
6
Reference
6-5


Cyclic communication can use the following functions: (1) Read status (2) Read output (Page 6-18) Outputs that can be read: HIGH output, LOW output, GO output, check output (3) Read P.V. value (Page 6-19) (4) Execute external input (Page 6-20) Inputs that can be used: External input 1, external input 2, external input 3, external input 4
6
6-6
Usable Connections
EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type usable by each device is defined in the EDS file. The DL-EP1 can use the following connections:
No Connection Name Input/Output DL-EP1 to scanner Scanner to DL-EP1 DL-EP1 to scanner Scanner to DL-EP1 Assembly Instance 64H (100) 65H (101) 64H (100) FEH (254) Size (Byte) 168 10 168 0 RPI Range (in 0.5 ms) Application Type
Reference
Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection type supports both point-to-point and multicast. The details of each application type are as follows: Exclusive Owner: This connection allows simultaneous setting of both data transmission from the scanner to the DL-EP1 and data transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is made not only when the scanner monitors the adaptor (DL-EP1) data, but also when it issues external inputs and rewrites the settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be opened to one adaptor (DL-EP1). Input Only: This connection allows only data transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is made when the scanner only monitors adaptor (DL-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an "Input Only" connection simultaneously to one adaptor (DLEP1). (* To simultaneously open connections from multiple scanners, set the Connection Type to Multicast.)
6
6-7

DL-EP1 data
Address 0 Address 1
Scanner IN area
Reference
6
Example)
51 12H
50 34H
49 56H
48 78H
6-8
Name Address (Byte) 0 Status 1 Sensor Error Status Sensor Warning Status Current Value 0 Over Range Current Value 0 Under Range Current Value 0 Invalid Current Value 1 Over Range (Unassigned) Current Value 1 Under Range (Unassigned) Current Value 1 Invalid (Unassigned) Output 1 (HIGH) Output 2 (LOW) Output 3 (GO) Output 4 (Check output) Output 5 (Unassigned) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Error Status ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID15 ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 DL-EP1 Error Status Reserved for system ..... ..... ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
6
ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
6-9
Name External Input Response 1 (External input 1) External Input Response 2 (External input 2) External Input Response 3 (External input 3) External Input Response 4 (External input 4) External Input Response 5 (Unassigned)
Address (Byte) 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
bit6
bit5
bit4 .....
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0 ID01
ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09
6
Error ID Number Error Code Warning ID Number Warning Code
Current Value 0 (Comparator Value (P.V.))
51 : 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 : 164 165 166 167 ID Number 15 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer) : ID Number 1 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer) ID Number 15 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer) :
6-10
Parameter List
Item Description
The error status of the DL-EP1 is output. DL-EP1 Error ON: An error occurred. Status OFF: No error occurred. The warning statuses of all the connected sensor amplifiers are output. When ON, a value is stored in "Warning ID Number" and "Warning Code". Warning Status When OFF, 0 is stored in "Warning ID Number" and "Warning Code". ON: A warning occurred in any of the connected sensor amplifiers. OFF: No warning occurred in the connected sensor amplifiers. The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor amplifiers are output. When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0 Error Status is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor amplifiers. OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers. The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is output. Sensor Error Status ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number. OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number. The bit of target ID number of the sensor amplifier where the warning occurred Sensor Warning is output. Status ON: A warning occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number. OFF: No warning occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number. The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is output. Current Value n ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID Over Range number is greater than the measurement upper limit. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less than the measurement upper limit. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the IB Series.) The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is output. Current Value n ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less Under Range than the measurement lower limit. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is greater than the measurement lower limit. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the IB Series.) The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is output. Current Value n ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is Invalid invalid. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is valid (normal). (* The current value 1 does not exist in the IB Series.) The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is output. Output 1: HIGH output Output 2: LOW output Output n (n: 1 to 5) Output 3: GO output Output 4: Check output Output 5: (Unassigned) ON: Output n is output. OFF: Output n is not output.
6
6-11
Item
Description An external input response is output when the corresponding external input request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication. The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output. ON: The external input request was made (ON). OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF). For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-19). If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored. Error priority: (1) DL-EP1 error (2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the highest priority)* * If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error with the smallest ID number has the highest priority. If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored. Error priority: (1) DL-EP1 error (2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the highest priority)* * If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error with the smallest ID number has the highest priority. "Error code list" (Page 6-13) When "Warning Status" is ON, the ID number of the sensor amplifier where the warning occurred is stored. If no warning has occurred, 0 is stored. If a warning occurs in multiple IDs, the smallest ID number is stored. (Priority: 0>1> to > 4) If "Warning Status" is ON, the warning code is stored. If no warning has occurred, 0 is stored. If two or more warnings occur in one sensor amplifier, the smallest warning code is stored. The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value 0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value 1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0 to 1) depend on the use conditions. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the IB Series.) "Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 6-12)
External Input Response n (n: 1 to 5)
Error ID Number
Error Code
6

Name Current Value 0 Current Value 1 Model Main unit/ expansion unit Main unit/ expansion unit Conditions Function Comparator value (P.V.) (Unassigned)
6-12
51
Unassigned ID error
52
6
0 53
54
Mixed model error
55
56
57
70
6-13
Error ID Number
Code 100 101 102 103 104 150 151 152
Actions
6
6-14
IB Series
Error ID Number Code Description Sensor amplifier error 1 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 2 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 3 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 4 of each ID numbe Sensor amplifier error 5 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 6 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 7 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 8 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 9 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 10 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 11 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 12 of each ID number Cause Actions
01H
02H
EEPROM error (ErE) Head error (transmitter/ receiver) (ErH/tr) T/R reverse connection error (alternate flashing of ErH/tr and ErH/rt) Transmitter internal error (ErH/t. int) Receiver error (ErH/r) Refer to the IB Series User's Manual. Transmitter error (ErH/t) Transmitter laser error (ErH/ LASEr) Model mismatch error (ErH/RAnGE) Ref. light quantity registration error (ErG/dArk, ErG/inF) Adjust error (Er.AdJ/dArk, Er.AdJ/ovEr, Er.AdJ/inF) Communication error between sensor amplifiers (Er.coM)
03H
04H
05H
01H to 04H (Each ID number)
06H
07H
6
08H
09H
0AH
0BH
0CH
Warning code list The following warning codes occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers. IB Series
Warning ID Number (HEX) 01H to 04H (Each ID number)
Code
Description
Cause
Actions
01H
Sensor amplifier warning 1 of each ID number
Check output state
Refer to the IB Series User's Manual.
6-15

DL-EP1 data
Scanner's OUT area
Name External Input Request 1 (External Input 1) Address (Byte) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 bit7 ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID15 ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... bit6 bit5 bit4 ..... ..... bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
6
External Input Request 2 (External Input 2) External Input Request 3 (External Input 3) External Input Request 4 (External Input 4) External Input Request 5 (Unassigned)
* External inputs 1 to 4 are assigned any function and used. For details on the functions to be assigned, refer to "IB User's Manual".
6-16
Parameter List
Name External Input Request 1 External Input Request 2 External Input Request 3 External Input Request 4 External Input Request 5 Function External input 1 Operation ON: Turns on timing external input 1. Turning on external input 1 also turns on external input response 1. OFF: Turns off external input 1. Turning off external input 1 also turns off external input response 1. ON: Turns on timing external input 2. Turning on external input 2 also turns on external input response 2. OFF: Turns off external input 2. Turning off external input 2 also turns off external input response 2. ON: Turns on timing external input 3. Turning on external input 3 also turns on external input response 3. OFF: Turns off external input 3. Turning off external input 3 also turns off external input response 3.
External input 2
External input 3
External input 4
ON: Turns on timing external input 4. Turning on external input 4 also turns on external input response 4. OFF: Turns off external input 4. Turning off external input 4 also turns off external input response 4.
(Unassigned)
(Unassigned)
6
6-17

Available outputs: HIGH, LOW, GO, and check output Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H" (Page 6-9)
6
ON OFF
(1)
6-18

Available external inputs: External input 1, External input 2, External input 3, External input 4 Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H" (Page 6-16)
(1)
(2)
Sensor amplifier
This example shows how to enter external input 2 to the sensor amplifier ID01. (1) The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor amplifier is turned on or off. (2) You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input response.
6
Point
If the external input or sensor amplifier input signal line from cyclic communication is ON, the sensor amplifier recognizes that the external input is ON and executes input operation (OR operation). For example, if the external input or sensor amplifier input signal line from cyclic communication is ON when laser transmission stop input is assigned to external input n, laser transmission stop input is executed. To use bank switching, set "bank switching method" to "external input switching".
6-19

(2)
(1)
4567 5678 7890 8901 6789
6
This example shows how to read the comparator values from the sensor amplifiers ID01, ID02, and ID03. (1) When the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication. * If the value is correct and measurement mode is % mode, the parameter range is -999.97 to +999.98. If the value is correct and measurement mode is dimension mode, the parameter range is -99.997 to +99.998. If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is retained without updating the current value. (2) The properties of the comparator value (Current Value n Over Range (each bit of IN area [6]), Current Value n Under Range (each bit of IN area [8]), and Current Value n Invalid (each bit of IN area [10]) are entered. If the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is "over", "under," or "invalid," the bit corresponding to the ID number of that sensor amplifier is set to 1. * For the IB Series, the comparator value is stored in the current value 0.
6-20

6
6-21
6-4

Send Receive
6

Receive Send
Reference
6-22


Scanner Command IB DL-EP1
6
Response: 1235
<Details of command> Service code: 0EH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0325H (805) IB Comparator values (P. V. values): 1235
6-23
Scanner Command: 500 IB DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 10H Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0389H(905) Service data: 500 IB auto hold trigger level: 100500
Response
Scanner IB DL-EP1 Command <Details of command> Service code: 4BH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0301H(769) External input 1 execution by IB
6
Response
Scanner Command IB DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 4CH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 00H Service data: 01H Changes using the sensor amplifier keys are locked.
Response
6-24
Scanner Command IB DL-EP1
Response
<Details of command> Service code: 4CH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0325H(805) Reads the number of decimal places of the IB comparator value (P.V. value).
Reference
For the IB Series, if measurement mode is "% mode" and the current value is 12.50%, data is stored as follows: Data: 1250 Number of decimal places: 2
6
125012.5012.5%
Number of decimal places 2 1
6-25

6
6-26
Reference
6
6-27

EtherNet/IP unit
Command
Response
Object Name
Class ID
Reference Page
DL Object
67H
6-32
Identity Object
01H 02H
9-22 9-25
6
Message Router Object Assembly Object Connection Manager Object TCP/IP Interface Object Ethernet Link Object
04H
9-26
06H F5H F6H
9-28 9-30 9-34
6-28


6
6-29
6
6-30

(1) Instance ID (2) Attribute ID (3) Name (4) Description Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is set to ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system (5) Attribute (6) Data Type
00H
74H (116)
Output 1
WORD
Description Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation. Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation. (* The parameter number 500 is the calculation function (attribute ID0381H (897).) Represents the attribute name. Describes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of parameters that can be set. Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID. R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single, Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value. W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used to write the attribute value. Represents the attribute data type.
6
(5) Attribute
(6) Data type
6-31

Service Code Service Name Description Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service, refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-53). Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service, refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-54). Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier. Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the object. Refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)" (Page 6-55). For examples of using this service, refer to "(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-55). Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code 09H is returned as a response. Setting 0: Not lock Setting 1: Key lock "Lock setting" (Page 6-33) For examples of using this service, refer to sensor amplifier operations" (Page 6-59). Acquisition of the number of decimal places *3 "(4) Locking
0EH
Parameter read
10H
Parameter write
4BH*1
6
Operation command
4CH
Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-60).
4DH
6-32
Lock setting
0 1
General Status 00H 05H 08H 09H Command Type Description (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Normal end The instance ID is out of range. The designated instance ID does not support this service or cannot be executed. The written data is out of range. Parameter write was executed for the function controlled by cyclic communication. An attempt to execute the operation command has failed. Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation command. An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the unwritable status. An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the unreadable status. The service data size is less than the defined size. The defined data size is stored in the additional status. The attribute ID is out of range. The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated instance ID is not connected. This service is supported by the designated instance ID but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID. (Additional status: C350H) In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be written into the parameter. (Additional status: C351H) The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional status: C352H) System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
6
0CH
0EH
10H 13H 14H 16H

-

1FH
FEH
6-33
Attributes
Instance ID Attribute ID Name Description Indicates the status of this unit and connected sensor amplifier. Bit0: DL-EP1 Error Status Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system Bit14: Warning Status Bit15: Error Status Indicates the error status of the connected senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned to ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system Indicates the warning status of each sensor amplifier. If a warning occurs, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is set to ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system Attribute Data Type
64H (100)
Status
WORD
65H (101)
Sensor Error Status
WORD
66H (102)
Warning Status
WORD
67H (103)
Reserved for system Indicates the status of current value 0 of each amplifier. If the current value 0 is 0ver Range", Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit corresponding to the ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned)
6
00H
68H (104)
WORD
WORD
Reserved for system Error ID Number Error Code Warning ID Number Warning Code Indicates the ID number of the unit having error. Parameter range: 0 to 4 Indicates the error code that is happening. Parameter range: 0 to 65535 Indicates the ID number of the device where the warning occurred. Parameter range: 0 to 4 Indicates the warning code that has occurred. Parameter range: 0 to 65535
R R R R
UINT UINT UINT UINT
Reserved for system Indicates the HIGH output (output 1) status of each amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
74H (116)
Output1 (HIGH)
WORD
6-34
Instance ID
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates the LOW output (output 2) status of each amplifier. When LOW is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system Indicates the GO output (output 3) status of each amplifier. When GO is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system Indicates the check output (output 4) status of each sensor amplifier. When HH is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned)
Attribute
Data Type
75H (117)
Output2 (LOW)
WORD
76H (118)
Output3 (GO)
WORD
77H (119)
Output4 (Check Output) Output5 (Unassigned)
WORD
78H (120) 79H (121) to 89H (137) 8AH (138)
WORD
Reserved for system When the current value 0 of each amplifier is invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
6
R WORD
00H
8BH (139)
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit Current of the corresponding ID number is turned ON. Value 0 Under Range Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system Current Value 0 Over Range Current Value 1 Invalid When the current value 0 of each amplifier is higher than the upper limit of the detection range, the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4 Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned)
WORD
8CH (140)
WORD
8DH (141) 8EH (142) 8FH (143) 90H (144)
WORD
Current Value 1 (Unassigned) Under Range Current Value 1 Over Range Current Value 0 (ID Number 1) (Unassigned) Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID number 1. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647
WORD
WORD
DINT
6-35
Instance ID
Attribute ID 91H (145) to 92H (146) 93H (147) 94H (148) to 9EH (158) 9FH (159) A0H (160) to AEH (174) AFH (175)
Name
Description
Attribute
Data Type
: Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID number 4. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647
Current Value 0 (ID Number 4) Current Value 0 (ID Number 5) to (ID Number 15)
WORD
(Unassigned)
DINT
(Unassigned)
DINT
Reserved for system Set up the condition to determine if the sensor error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error (MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or warning occurs. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Not mask 1: Mask Indicates the number of connected sensor amplifiers. Parameter range: 0 to 4
6
00H B0H (176) Sensor Status Mask Setting
R/W
UINT
B1H (177) B2H (178) to C7H (199) 0300H (768) 0301H (769) to 0303H (771) 0304H (772)
UINT
Indicates the error code of ID number 0. Parameter range: 0 to 65535
UINT
Indicates the error code of ID number 4. Parameter range: 0 to 65535
UINT
6-36
Instance ID
Attribute ID 0305H (773) to 030FH (783) 0310H (784) to 04FFH (1279)
Name Error Code (ID number 5) to (ID number 15)
Description
Attribute
Data Type
(Unassigned)
UINT
00H
Reserved for system
Reference
"Current
6
6-37
Attributes for IB Series Designate the ID number (01H to 04H) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID. If the parameter range is data with a decimal point, read or write the data as an integer, ignoring the decimal point. For example, if you want to write +1.235 (dimension mode) in HIGH setting value (BANK0), write +1235.
Class Attribute ID 0320H (800) Name Group1 Entry count Description Indicates the group 1 entry count. Parameter range: 29 Reads the error status. If an error occurs, the corresponding bit is set to ON. Bit 0: Overcurrent error (ErC) Bit 1: EEPROM error (ErE) Bit 2: Head error (transmitter/receiver)ErH/t r Bit 3: T/R reverse connection error (alternate flashing of ErH/rt and ErH/tr) Bit 4: Transmitter internal error (ErH/t.int Bit 5: Receiver error (ErH/r Bit 6: Transmitter error (ErH/t Bit 7: Transmitter laser error ErH/LASEr Bit 8: Model mismatch error rH/rAnGE Bit 9: Ref. light quantity registration error (rG/dArK,ErG/inF) Bit 10: Adjust error (Er. AdJ/dArK, Er. AdJ/ovEr, Er. AdJ/inF) Bit 11: Communication error between sensor amplifiers Er.coM Reads the warning status. If a warning occurs, the corresponding bit is set to ON. Bit 0: 1 when the sensor amplifier is in the check output state (check output is ON when N.O. and OFF when N.C.) Attribute R Data Type DINT
0321H (801)
Error status
*1
DWORD
6
Group1 0322H (802) Warning Status (Check Output State) Warning function operating state (Check Output Function Operation Status)
DWORD
0323H (803)
Reads the warning function operation status. If the warning function is in operation, the corresponding bit is set to ON. Bit 0: 1 when the check output function is ON
DWORD
0324H (804)
Judgement output/Check output
Reads the sensor output status. If the output is ON, the corresponding bit is set to ON. Bit 0: HIGH Bit 1: LOW Bit 2: GO Bit 3: Check output Read the comparator value (P.V.). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999
DWORD
0325H (805)
Judgment value (P.V.)*2
DINT
6-38
Class
Name Internal measurement value (R.V.)*2
Description Read the R.V. value. When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 When the hold function is other than sample hold Reads the peak hold value during sampling. When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 When the hold function is sample hold When measurement mode is % mode: -999.98 When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.998 When the hold function is other than sample hold Reads the bottom-hold value during sampling. When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 When the hold function is sample hold When measurement mode is % mode: -999.98 When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.998
Attribute
Data Type
DINT
0327H (807)
Peak-hold value in hold mode*2
DINT
0328H (808)
Bottom-hold value in hold mode*2
DINT
6
R DINT
Group1
0329H (809)
(Reserved for system) Reads the current analog output value. (Main unit only) Parameter range: Voltage: -5.000 to +5.000 (when an error occurs: +5.500) 4 to 20 mA:+4.00 to +20.00 (when an error occurs: +3.00) OFF: Fixed at 0 Reads the number of the currently operating bank. Check the number of bank where the sensor amplifier is actually operating from this attribute. Parameter range: 0 to 3 0: Bank 0 1: Bank 1 2: Bank 2 3: Bank 3
032AH (810)
Analog output value
032BH (811)
Bank status
DINT
032CH (812)
Reads the timing status of the operating sensor amplifier. Check the timing status of the actually operating Timing status amplifier from this attribute. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Sampling now in progress 1: Sampling not in progress (Reserved for system)
DINT
032DH (813) to 0331H (817)
6-39
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Reads the transmission stop status of the actually operating sensor amplifier. Check the transmission stop status of the actually operating amplifier from this attribute. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Transmission now in progress 1: Transmission stop now in progress (transmission stop input ON/laser errpr/head error) Reads the abnormal setting status. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Normal setting 1: Abnormal setting Reads the external input setting status. When the external input line of the sensor amplifier or the external input of cyclic communication is ON, the corresponding bit is set to ON. The external input operates even if "Not use" is selected in External Input 1-4 Function Selection. Bit 0: External input 1 Bit 1: External input 2 Bit 2: External input 3 Bit 3: External input 4 Reads the EEPROM writing result. Parameter range: 0 to 2 0: Writing now 1: Normal end 2: Abnormal end Reads the execution result of the zero shift or zero shift reset. Parameter range: 0 to 2 0: Zero shift or zero shift reset execution now in progress 1: Normal end 2: Abnormal end (SHiFt Err) Reads the reset execution result. Parameter range: 0 to 2 0: Reset execution now in progress 1: Normal end 2: Abnormal end
Attribute
Data Type
0332H (818)
Laser emission stop status
DINT
0333H (819)
Abnormal setting*3
DINT
0334H (820) Group1
External input status
DWORD
6
0335H (821)
EEPROM writing result*4
DINT
0336H (822)
Zero shift execution result*5
DINT
0337H (823)
Reset execution result
DINT
6-40
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Reads the system parameter current state. Check the system parameter of the actually operating amplifier from this attribute. The bit corresponding to the current state is set to ON. Bit0: 0:NPN 1:PNP Bits 1 to 3 (main unit only. The expansion unit is fixed at 000.) 000: OFF 001: 0 to 5 V 010: -5 to 5 V 011: 1 to 5 V 100: 4 to 20 mA
Attribute
Data Type
0338H (824)
System parameter current state*6
DINT
0339H (825)
(Reserved for system) Reads the Ref. light registration result. Parameter range: 0 to 3 0: Ref. light registration now in progress 1: Normal end 2: Insufficient light reception error 3: Interfering light error Reads the adjust/adjust reset execution result. Parameter range: 0 to 4 0: Adjust/adjust reset execution now in progress 1: Normal end 2: Insufficient light quantity error 3: Interfering light error 4: Light quantity excess error Reads the execution result of tolerance/two-point tuning. Parameter range: 0 to 2 0: Tolerance/two-point tuning execution now in progress 1: Normal end 2: Abnormal end Reads the execution result of measured correction/theoretical correction. Parameter range: 0 to 2 0: Measured correction/theoretical correction execution now in progress 1: Normal end 2: Abnormal end
033AH (826)
Ref. light registration result
DINT
Group1 033BH (827) Adjust result
6
R DINT
033CH (828)
Tuning result*7
DINT
033DH (829)
Correction result*8
DINT
033EH (830) to 033FH (831)
6-41
Class
Name Group2 Entry count HIGH setting value (BANK 0)
Description Indicates the group 2 entry count. Parameter range: 12 Sets the HIGH setting value (BANK 0). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 20.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 2,000) Sets the LOW setting value (BANK 0). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 10.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 1,000) Sets the shift target value (BANK 0). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0.000) Sets the HIGH setting value (BANK 1). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 20.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 2,000) Sets the LOW setting value (BANK 1). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 10.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 1,000) Sets the shift target value (BANK 1). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0.000) Sets the HIGH setting value (BANK 2). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 20.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 2,000) Sets the LOW setting value (BANK 2). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 10.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 1,000) Sets the shift target value (BANK 2). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0.000)
Attribute R
Data Type DINT
0341H (833)
R/W
DINT
0342H (834)
LOW setting value (BANK 0)
R/W
DINT
0343H (835)
Shift target value (BANK 0)
R/W
DINT
0344H (836)
HIGH setting value (BANK 1)
R/W
DINT
6
Group2
0345H (837)
R/W
DINT
0346H (838)
R/W
DINT
0347H (839)
HIGH setting value (BANK 2)
R/W
DINT
0348H (840)
R/W
DINT
0349H (841)
R/W
DINT
6-42
Class
Attribute ID
Name HIGH setting value (BANK 3)
Description Sets the HIGH setting value (BANK 3). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 20.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 2,000) Sets the LOW setting value (BANK 3). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 10.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 1,000) Sets the shift target value (BANK 3). When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0.000)
Attribute
Data Type
034AH (842)
R/W
DINT
034BH (843) Group2 034CH (844) 034DH (845) to 035FH (863) 0360H (864) 0361H (865)
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
(Reserved for system) Group3 Entry count Key lock setting Indicates the group 3 entry count. Parameter range: 20 Sets key lock. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Unlock 1: Key lock Reads the current attribute. Check the number of the bank where the sensor amplifier is operating from the bank status (032BH811)). Parameter range: 0 to 3
DINT
R/W
DINT
6
DINT
0362H (866) Group3
Bank setting
Changes the operating bank. To change the bank number using this attribute, set "bank switching method (0396H(918))" to "button". For "external input", this attribute is invalid. Parameter range: 0 to 3 0: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 0. 1: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 1. 2: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 2. 3: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 3. Sets the timing input. Check the timing input status of the operating sensor amplifier according to the timing status (032CH(812)). The sensor amplifier operates based on OR of the external input line and cyclic communication. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Timing input OFF 1: Timing input ON
DINT
0363H (867)
Timing input*9
R/W
DINT
6-43
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Sets the laser emission stop input status. Check the emission stop input status of the operating sensor amplifier from the transmission stop status (0332H(818)). The sensor amplifier operates based on OR of the external input line and cyclic communication. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Emission stop input OFF 1: Emission stop input ON
Attribute
Data Type
0364H (868)
Laser emission stop input*9
R/W
DINT
0365H (869) to 0367H (871)
(Reserved for system) Sets the sub display's screen. Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0) 0: r.v value 1: Analog value 2: HI setting value 3: LO setting value 4: Zero shift value Sets the system parameter. Reflecting the system parameter setting requires "system parameter set execution request (0306H(774)) of the operation command after the setting is written. Check the system parameter of the operating sensor amplifier from 0338(H824). Bit0: 0:NPN 1:PNP Bits 1 to 3 (main unit only. The expansion unit is fixed at 000.) 000: OFF 001: 0 to 5 V 010: 5 to 5 V 011: -1 to 5 V 100: 4 to 20 mA Sets the tolerance setting width. When measurement mode is % mode: 0.00 to 999.99 (initial value: 10.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: 0.000 to 99.999 (initial value: 1,000) Sets the correction method. Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0) 0: No correction 1: Measured correction 2: Theoretical correction (% mode only)
0368H (872)
Sub display's screen
R/W
DINT
Group3
6
0369H (873) System parameter*6
R/W
DINT
036AH (874)
Tol. tuning setting width
R/W
DINT
036BH (875)
Calibration function
*10, *11
R/W
DINT
6-44
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Sets the 1st-point target value of the measured correction or logical correction. When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (measured correction only) (initial value: 0.000) Sets the 2nd-point target value of the measured correction or logical correction. When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 100.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (measured correction only) (initial value: 10.000)
Attribute
Data Type
036CH (876)
Meas./Logical correct target 1

*10, *11, *12
R/W
DINT
036DH (877)
Meas./Logical correct target 2

*10, *11, *12
R/W
DINT
Group3
036EH (878) to 0372H (882)
(Reserved for system) Sets the logical correction 1st-point measurement value. When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: Unusable Sets the logical correction 2nd-point measurement value. When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 100.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: Unusable
0373H (883)
Logical correction measured 1

*11, *12
R/W
DINT
0374H (884)
Logical correction measured 2

*11, *12
6
R/W DINT
0375H (885) to 037FH (895) 0380H (896) 0381H (897) 0382H (898)
(Reserved for system) Group4 Entry count Indicates the group 4 entry count. Parameter range: 30
DINT
(Reserved for system) Measurement mode15 Received/ Blocked light mode Sets measurement mode. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: % mode 1: Dimension mode Sets light entrance/light shading amount mode. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Light entrance amount display 1: Light shading amount display
R/W
DINT
Group4
0383H (899) 0384H (900)
R/W
DINT
6-45
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Sets the averaging/high-path filter. Parameter range: 0 to 19 (initial value: 5) 0 : 1 times 1 : Twice 2 : 4 times 3 : 8 times 4 : 16 times 5 : 64 times 6 : 256 times 7 : 1024 times 8 : 4096 times 9 : 16384 times 10 : 0.1Hz 11 : 0.2Hz 12 : 0.5Hz 13 : 1Hz 14 : 2Hz 15 : 5Hz 16 : 10Hz 17 : 20Hz 18 : 50Hz 19 : 100Hz Sets output mode. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: N.O. 1: N.C.
Attribute
Data Type
0385H (901)
Averaging/ High-pass filter
R/W
DINT
6
Group4
0386H (902) 0387H (903)
Output mode
R/W
DINT
(Reserved for system) Sets the hold function. Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 0) 0: Sample hold 1: Peak hold 2: Bottom hold 3: Peak-to-peak hold 4: Auto peak hold 5: Auto bottom hold Sets the auto peak hold trigger level or auto bottom hold trigger level. When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 90.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 9,000) Sets the timing input. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Level 1: Edge Sets the delay timer. Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0) 0: OFF 1: On delay 2: Off delay 3: One shot
0388H (904)
Hold function setting
R/W
DINT
0389H (905)
Auto hold trigger level
R/W
DINT
038AH (906)
Timing input setting
R/W
DINT
038BH (907)
Delay timer
R/W
DINT
6-46
Class
Attribute ID 038CH (908)
Name Timer duration
Description Sets the timer duration. Parameter range: 1 to 9999 (initial value: 60) 1 to 9999 Sets the hysteresis. When measurement mode is % mode: 0.00 to 999.99 (initial value: 0.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: 0 to 99.999 (initial value: 0) Sets the analog output scaling. (Main unit only) Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Initial state 1: Free range Sets the analog output upper limit. (Main unit only) When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 100.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 10,000) Sets the analog output lower limit. (Main unit only) When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0) Sets whether to change external input 1 to 4 function assignment from the initial state. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Initial setting 1: User setting Sets the function to be assigned to external input 1. Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0) 0: Zero shift input 1: Bank A input 2: Bank B input 3: Laser emission stop input 4: Not use Sets the function to be assigned to external input 2. Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0) 0: Reset input 1: Bank A input 2: Bank B input 3: Laser emission stop input 4: Not use
Attribute R/W
Data Type DINT
038DH (909)
Hysteresis
R/W
DINT
038EH (910)
Analog output scaling*13
R/W
DINT
038FH (911)
Analog output upper limit*13
R/W
DINT
Group4
0390H (912)
Analog output lower limit*13
R/W
DINT
0391H (913)
External input setting

*14
6
R/W DINT
0392H (914)
Ext. IN1 function selection*14
R/W
DINT
0393H (915)
R/W
DINT
6-47
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Sets the function to be assigned to external input 3. Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0) 0: Timing input 1: Bank A input 2: Bank B input 3: Laser emission stop input 4: Not use Sets the function to be assigned to external input 4. Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 4) 0: Adjust input 1: Bank A input 2: Bank B input 3: Laser emission stop input 4: Not use Sets the bank switching method. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Button 1: External Input
Attribute
Data Type
0394H (916)
R/W
DINT
0395H (917)
R/W
DINT
0396H (918) 0397H (919) 0398H (920)
Bank switching method
R/W
DINT
(Reserved for system) Save zeroshift state Sets whether to store the zero shift status. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0:OFF 1:ON
R/W
DINT
6
Group4 0399H (921)
(Reserved for system) Sets the display resolution. When measurement mode is % mode: 0: Initial setting (dEFLt) (initial value) 1: (Reserved for system) 2: (Reserved for system) 3:0.01 4:0.1 5:1 When measurement mode is dimension mode: 0: Initial setting (dEFLt) (initial value) 1: (Reserved for system) 2:0.001 3:0.01 4:0.1 5:1 Sets the power saving function. Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0) 0:OFF 1: Half 2: All
039AH (922)
Display digit
R/W
DINT
039BH (923) 039CH (924)
Power savefunction
R/W
DINT
6-48
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Sets the display colors of judgement output indicators. Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0) 0: Only GO is green (initial status) 1: Only GO is red 2: All P.V. values are green 3: All P.V. values are red Sets P.V. value display colors. Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0) 0: Green when GO (initial status) 1: Red when GO 2: All P.V. values are green 3: All P.V. values are red
Attribute
Data Type
039DH (925)
Judgment indicator color
R/W
DINT
Group4 039EH (926) P.V. value display color
R/W
DINT
039FH (927) 03A0H (928) 03A1H (929) 03A2H (930) 03A3H (931) 03A4H (932) 03A5H (933) Group5 03A6H (934) 03A7H (935)
(Reserved for system) Group5 Entry count Save adjust state Adjust level Auto adjust function Auto adjust level Check output function Indicates the group 5 entry count. Parameter range: 9 Sets whether to store the adjust status. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0:OFF 1:ON Sets an adjust level. Parameter range: 1 to 30 (initial value: 20) Sets whether to enable the auto adjust function. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Disable 1: Enable Sets an auto adjust level. 0.50 to 20.00 (initial value: 3.00) Sets whether to enable the check output function. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: OFF 1: ON Sets the light quantity level of the check output function. Parameter range: 1 to 30 (initial value: 10) Sets error output mode. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Normal mode (initial status) 1: Compatibility mode Sets the trigger level hysteresis. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Initial state 1: User setting Sets the hysteresis setting value for trigger level. When measurement mode is % mode: 0.00 to 999.99 (initial value: 1.00) When measurement mode is dimension mode: 0.000 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.100) R DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
6
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
Check output light level Error output mode Hysteresis for trigger level Hys. set value for trigger level
R/W
DINT
R/W
DINT
03A8H (936)
R/W
DINT
03A9H (937) 03AAH (938) to 03BFH (959)
R/W
DINT
6-49
Class
Attribute ID 03C0H (960) 03C1H (961) 03C2H (962)
Description Indicates the group 6 entry count. Parameter range: 11
Attribute R R R
Data Type DINT DINT DINT
Indicates the product code. Product code Main unit: 4020 Expansion unit: 4021 Revision Indicates the revision. Parameter range: 0101H Indicates the model of the head connected to the sensor head connector (transmission side). Parameter range: 0 to 4 0: No head is connected or the R head is connected. 1: IB-01 2: IB-05 3: IB-10 4: IB-30 Indicates the model of the head connected to the sensor head connector (light receiving side). Parameter range: 0 to 4 0: No head is connected or the T head is connected. 1: IB-01 2: IB-05 3: IB-10 4: IB-30
03C3H (963)
Transmission Side Head Model
DINT
03C4H (964) Group6 03C5H (965) to 03C7H (967) 03C8H (968) 03C9H (969) to 03D6H (982) 03D7H (983) 03D8H (984) 03D9H (985) 03DAH (986) to 03DFH (991)
Light Receiving Side Head Model
DINT
6
(Reserved for system) Indicates the sensor product name. Main unit: "IB-1000/1500" Expansion unit: "IB-1050/1550"
Product name
STRING
(Reserved for system) Indicates the series code. Main unit: 4020 Expansion unit: 4021 Indicates the series version. Parameter range: 1 Indicates the device type. Parameter range: 0
Series code Series version Device type
R R R
DINT DINT DINT
*1
You can check the error contents of the sensor amplifier according to the ON/OFF status of each bit. OFF(0): No error occurred. ON(1): An error occurred. Two or more errors may simultaneously occur. For details on each error, refer to "IB Series User's Manual".
6-50
*2
*3
*4 *5 *6
If the read data is any of the following, the meaning of this attribute differs from the meaning of the comparator value. When measurement mode is % mode: + 999.99: The value exceeds the upper limit of the display range. -999.99: The value exceeds - 999.98 or the lower limit of the display range. -999.98: The value is "-----" (comparator value invalid). +1000.00: The sensor amplifier is in the error status. When measurement mode is dimension mode: +99.999: The value exceeds the upper limit of the display range. -99.999: -99.998 or the lower limit of the display range. -99.998: The value is "-----" (comparator value invalid). +100,000: The sensor amplifier is in the error status. If a write for which a combination of inhibited functions is set is executed, abnormal setting (1) occurs. For details on each function, refer to "IB Series User's Manual". The results of "initial reset request" and "system parameter set request" for the operation command are also included in this item. The execution result for the lastly requested item of "zero shift execution request" or "zero shift request execution request" is read. You can check the system parameter of the sensor amplifier by reading "system parameter current state". The system parameter sets a judgement output, check output polarity, and analog output. Designate the system parameter set when the operation command executes "system parameter set request" as "system parameter". A read or write value is designated by ON/OFF of each of the bits to be converted to a binary number.
Bit 0 Setting 0: NPN output 1: PNP output 000: Analog output OFF 001: 0 to 5V 010: -5 to +5V 011: 1 to 5V 100: 4 to 20mA (Fixed to 000 for expansion unit)
6
3, 2, 1
Reference
When the read data is "6": "6" is converted to "0110" in binary representation.
0110 0
Bits 3, 2, 1: 1 to 5 V Bit 0: NPN output For this reason, the sensor amplifier that read data is set to "NPN output" and "analog output 1 to 5 V". *7 Of "tolerance tuning request", "2-point tuning HIGH side 2nd", and "2-point tuning LOW side 2nd" for the operation command, the execution result for the lastly requested item is read.
6-51
*8
*9 *10
6
*11
*12
*13 *14
*15
The execution result for the lastly requested item of "measured correction" or "logical correction" is read. In the following cases, the execution result becomes "2: Abnormal end". The setting value is out of the parameter range. The 2nd-point correction execution is requested without the 1st-point correction execution requested. Correction execution is requested when calibration function setting is "0: Initial setting". Logical correction execution is requested when calibration function is setting is "1: Measured correction". Measured correction execution is requested when calibration function setting is "2: Logical correction". Logical correction execution is requested when measurement mode is dimension mode. This attribute operates as OFF only when input OFF(0) is written and external input is OFF in wiring and cyclic communication. To execute measured correction, set the calibration function (036BH(875)) to "1. Measured correction". When executing measured correction, set measured correction 1st-point target value (036CH(876)) and measured correction 2nd-point target value (036DH(877)) and then execute the measured correction execution request (operation command , 0313(H787), 0314H(788)). To execute measured correction, set the calibration function (036BH(875)) to "2. Measured correction". When executing theoretical correction, set theoretical correction 1st target value (036CH(876)), theoretical correction 2nd target value (036DH(877)), theoretical correction 1st measurement value (0373H(883)), and theoretical correction 2nd measurement value (0374H(884)) and then execute the theoretical correction execution request (operation command (031AH(794), 031BH(795)). Executing other settings in the middle of the 1st- or 2nd-point target or measurement value makes it impossible to complete calibration setting. Be sure to set the 1st- and 2nd-point target or measurement values continuously. If an attempt is made to write data to the expansion unit, a write error occurs. To reflect the settings written in external input 1 to 4 function selection (0392H(914) to 0395H(917)) in the sensor amplifier, you must set external input setting (0391H(913)) to 1 (user setting) or set external input setting to "user setting" in button operation of the sensor amplifier. When a write is executed, the data communication time between the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifier becomes approx. 1 second. "Data Processing Time" (Page 8-3)
6-52
Using DL Object

Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 0EH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Description Designates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). Designates the ID number. Designates the attribute ID to be read from "Attribute". There is no service data. Data Example Communicating with IB Series 0EH 67H 0AH 0324H(804) -
6-53

6
General status
00H
6-54

Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4BH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID
Point
6
Before executing the operation command, check that the sensor amplifier can execute the operation command. For details on the check method, refer to "IB Series User's Manual". Also, check that the executed operation command ends normally.
Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command) The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected. The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected. Attribute ID Name Description Executes zero shift. Turning off the sensor amplifier after executing zero shift restores the state before the zero shift function is used. If the shift state is retained even after the sensor amplifier is turned off, set the saving zero shift value function to ON. Resets the zero shift value. Executes reset
0301H (769)
Zero shift request
0302H (770) 0303H (771)
Zero shift reset request Resets request
6-55
Name Error clear request
Description Clears the ref. light quantity registration error [ErG] and adjust error [ErAdJ]. Initializes all the settings other than the calibration, ref. light quantity registration, and system parameters of the sensor amplifier. All parameters are stored in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) approx. 3 minutes after the initial reset request is executed. After the initial reset request has been executed, "EEPROM write result" of the attribute for IB Series becomes normal end (1). Changes the contents of the system parameter (settings of judgement output, check output polarity, and analog output) to the contents written in "system parameter" of the attribute for the IB Series. When executing the system parameter set, change the contents tailored to the connected devices and wiring. If the contents are changed by mistake, the devices connected to the sensor amplifier may go down. Registers the ref. light quantity. Executes the adjust function. Turning off the sensor amplifier after executing the adjust function restores the state before the adjust function is executed. If the adjust value is retained even after the sensor amplifier is turned off, set the adjust status storage function to ON. Initializes the adjust value. Executes tolerance tuning. Set the tolerance setting width using the attribute for IB Series "tolerance setting width".
0305H (773)
0306H (774)
System parameter set request
6
030AH (778)
Ref. light registration request
030BH (779)
Adjust request
030CH (780) 030EH (782) 030FH (783) 0310H (784) 0311H (785) 0312H (786)
Adjust reset request Tolerance tuning request
2-point tuning HIGH side 1st req 2-point tuning HIGH side 2nd req (Determine HIGH Executes 2-point tuning. setting value.) For details on the two-point tuning execution 2-point tuning LOW side procedure, refer to "IB Series User's Manual". 1st req 2-point tuning LOW side 2nd req (Determine LOW setting value)
6-56
Name Measured correction 1st req (SET1 confirmation operation)
Description
0314H (788)
031AH (794)
031BH (795)
Executes measured correction. Set the R.V. value that you want to display in the attribute for the IB Series "Measured Correction/Theoretical Correction 1st Point Target Value" or "Measured Correction/ Measured correction Theoretical Correction 2nd Point Target Value". 2nd req For details on the measured correction (SET2 confirmation execution procedure, refer to "IB Series User's operation) Manual".*2, *4 Logical correction 1st Executes logical correction. Set the R.V. value that you want to correct in req the attribute for IB Series "logical correction 1st (SET1 confirmation operation) point measurement value" or "logical correction 2nd point measurement value". Set the R.V. value that you want to display in the attribute for the IB Series "Measured Logical correction 2nd Correction/Logical Correction 1st Point Target req Value" or "Measured Correction/Theoretical (SET2 confirmation Correction 2nd Point Target Value". operation) For details on the measured correction execution procedure, refer to "IB Series User's Manual".*3, *4
6
*2 To execute measured correction, set the calibration function (036BH(875)) to "1. Measured correction". When executing measured correction, set measured correction 1st-point target value (036CH(876)) and measured correction 2nd-point target value036DH(877)) and then execute the measured correction execution request (operation command , 0313H(787)), 0314H788. *3 To execute measured correction, set the calibration function (036BH(875)) to "2. Measured correction". When executing logical correction, set logical correction 1st target value (036CH(876)), logical correction 2nd target value (036DH(877)), logical correction 1st measurement value (0373H(883)), and logical correction 2nd measurement value (0374H(884)) and then execute the logical correction execution request (operation command (031AH(794), 031BH(795)). *4 Executing other settings in the middle of the 1st- or 2nd-point target or measurement value makes it impossible to complete calibration setting. Be sure to set the 1st- and 2nd-point target or measurement values continuously. Commands Item Service Code Class ID Description Designates the "operation command (4BH)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Data Example 4BH 67H
6-57
Item Instance ID
Description Designates the ID number. The ID number (00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated. Designates the attribute ID to be designated from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)" (Page 6-55) There is no service response data.
Data Example 08H
Attribute ID
0301H(769)
Service Data
6
6-58

6
Point
If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to the DLEP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensor amplifier are not changed).
6-59
Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4DH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Description Designates parameter read (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Designates the ID number. Designates the attribute ID to be read from "Attribute". There is no service data. Data Example 4DH 67H 01H 03A1H (929) -
6
Service Data
6-60
Communicating with FD-MH Series
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart. 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 What is EtherNet/IP?...........................................7-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ....7-3 Cyclic communication..........................................7-5 Message Communication ..................................7-21
7-1
7-1
7
Scanner
7-2
7-2
Sensor amplifier
Output
EtherNet/IP scanner
DL-EP1
Output
Comparator Value
IN area
Setting value
Comparator Value
OUT area
External input
IN area
OUT area

The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions:
7
Communicating with FD-MH Series Communication Methods Message Communication (Page 7-21)
Function of sensor amplifier Read status Read output Read current value Execute external input Change bank number Rewrite setting value Motion command Read current value, setting, and status Read number of decimal places Rewrite setting value Lock all
Cyclic communication (Page 7-5)
X
7-3
7
Point
7-4
7-3
7
Reference
7-5


Cyclic communication can use the following functions: (1) Read status (2) Read output (Page 7-17) Outputs that can be read: Output 1, output 2, output 3 (3) Read current value (instantaneous flow rate) (Page 7-18) (4) Execute external input (Page 7-19) Inputs that can be used: Integration reset, flow HOLD reset, temperature HOLD reset
7
7-6
Usable Connections
Reference
7
7-7

DL-EP1 data
Address 0 Address 1
Scanner IN area
Reference
Example)
7
51 12H
50 34H
49 56H
48 78H
7-8
Name Address (Byte) 0 Status 1 Sensor Error Status Sensor Warning Status Current Value 0 Over Range Current Value 0 Under Range Current Value 0 Invalid Current Value 1 Over Range Current Value 1 Under Range Current Value 1 Invalid Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Output 2 21 22 Output 3 23 24 25 26 27 Error Status ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID15 ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 DL-EP1 Error Status Reserved for system ..... ..... ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
7
ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
Output 4 (Unassigned) Output 5 (Unassigned)
7-9
Name External Input Response 1 (Integration reset) External Input Response 2 (Flow HOLD reset) External Input Response 3 (Unassigned) External Input Response 4 (Temperature HOLD reset) External Input Response 5 (Unassigned) Error ID Number Error Code Warning ID Number
Address (Byte) 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
bit6
bit5
bit4 .....
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0 ID01
ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15 ..... ID15
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09 ID01
.....
ID09
7
Warning Code
Current Value 0 (Current value (Instantaneous flow rate))
51 : 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 : 164 165 166 167 ID Number 15 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer) : ID Number 1 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer) ID Number 15 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer) :
7-10
Parameter List
Item Description
The error status of the DL-EP1 is output. DL-EP1 Error ON: An error occurred. Status OFF: No error occurred. Warning Status (Unassigned) The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor amplifiers are output. When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0 Error Status is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor amplifiers. OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers. The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is output. Sensor Error Status ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number. OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number. Sensor Warning (Unassigned) Status The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is output. Current Value n ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID Over Range number is greater than the measurement upper limit. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less than the measurement upper limit. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the FD-MH Series.) The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is output. Current Value n ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less Under Range than the measurement lower limit. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is greater than the measurement lower limit. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the FD-MH Series.) The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is output. Current Value n ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is Invalid invalid. (n: 0 to 1) OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is valid (normal). (* The current value 1 does not exist in the FD-MH Series.) The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is output. Output 1: Output 1 Output 2: Output 2 Output n (n: 1 to 5) Output 3: Output 3 Output 4: (Unassigned) Output 5: (Unassigned) ON: Output n is output. OFF: Output n is not output. An external input response is output when the corresponding external input request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication. External Input The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output. Response ON: The external input request was made (ON). n (n: 1 to 5) OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF). For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-18).
7
7-11
Item
Description If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored. Error priority: (1) DL-EP1 error (2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the highest priority)* * If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error with the smallest ID number has the highest priority. If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored. Error priority: (1) DL-EP1 error (2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the highest priority)* * If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error with the smallest ID number has the highest priority. "Error code list" (Page 7-13) (Unassigned) (Unassigned) The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value 0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value 1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0 to 1) depend on the use conditions. (* The current value 1 does not exist in the FD-MH Series.) "Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 7-12)
Error ID Number
Error Code
7
Name Current Value 0 Current Value 1

Model Main unit/ expansion unit Main unit/ expansion unit Conditions Function Current value (instantaneous flow rate) (Unassigned)
7-12
51
Unassigned ID error
52
0 53
A sensor amplifier not supported by the DL-EP1 is connected. Sensor amplifiers outside the specifications have a mixed connection. ID number assignment is successful but communication failed during the subsequent initial communication. The number of connected sensor amplifiers exceeds the allowable range. An error occurred during communication between sensor amplifiers. The IP address is the same as another device.
7
54
Mixed model error
55
56
57
70
7-13
Error ID Number
Code 100 101 102 103 104 150 151 152
Actions
FD-MH Series
Error ID Number Code Description Sensor amplifier error 1 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 2 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 3 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 4 of each ID numbe Sensor amplifier error 5 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 6 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 7 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 8 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 9 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 10 of each ID number Sensor amplifier error 11 of each ID number Cause Actions
01H
Head error (ErS)
02H
Head connection error (ErH)
7
03H
04H
EEPROM error (ErE)
05H 01H to 0BH (Each ID number)
06H
The instantaneous flow rate remains unchanged (dry water).
Refer to the FD-MH Series User's Manual.
07H
Backflow error (rEv)
08H
(Not used)
09H
Temperature lower limit error
0AH
Temperature upper limit error Temperature sensor connection error (Err tEMP)
0BH
7-14
Warning code list No warning code occurs in the DL-EP1 and in the FD-MH Series sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1.

DL-EP1 data
Scanner's OUT area
Name External Input Request 1 (Integration Reset) External Input Request 2 (Flow HOLD Reset) External Input Request 3 (Unassigned) External Input Request 4 (Temperature HOLD Reset) External Input Request 5 (Unassigned) Address (Byte) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 bit7 ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID08 Reserved for system ID15 ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... ID15 ..... ..... bit6 bit5 bit4 ..... ..... bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09 ID01 ID09
7
7-15
Parameter List
Name External Input Request 1 External Input Request 2 External Input Request 3 External Input Request 4 External Input Request 5 Function Operation ON: Executes integration reset. Executing integration reset turns on Integration reset external input response 1. OFF: Turns off external input response 1. Flow HOLD reset ON: Executes flow HOLD reset. Executing flow HOLD reset turns on external input response 2. OFF: Turns off timing. Turning off timing also turns off external input response 2. (Unassigned) ON: Executes temperature HOLD reset. Executing temperature HOLD reset turns on external input response 4. OFF: Turns off external input response 4. (Unassigned)
(Unassigned) Temperature HOLD reset (Unassigned)
7
7-16
The following describes how the scanner cyclically communicates with the DL-EP1 (cyclic communication). "Reading an output from a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-17) "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-18) "Reading the current value (instantaneous flow rate) of the sensor amplifier" (Page 7-19) For the message communication method, refer to "Message communication" (Page 7-4).

Available outputs: Output 1, output 2, output 3 Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H" (Page 7-9)
ON OFF
(1)
7
7-17

Available external inputs: Integration reset, flow HOLD reset, temperature HOLD reset Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H" (Page 7-15)
(1)
(2)
Sensor amplifier External Input Flow HOLD reset to ID 01
ON OFF
This example shows how to enter flow HOLD reset to the sensor amplifier ID01. (1) The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor amplifier is turned on or off. (2) You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input response.
7
7-18
Reading the current value (instantaneous flow rate) of the sensor amplifier
The current value (instantaneous flow rate) is read from the IN area to which the ID number of each sensor amplifier is assigned. Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H" (Page 7-9)
(2)
(1)
4567 5678 7890 8901 6789
This example shows how to read the current value from the sensor amplifiers ID01, ID02, and ID03. (1) When the current value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication. * If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is retained without updating the current value. (2) The property of the current value is entered. If the current value is "over (FFFF)" or "invalid (----)", the bit corresponding to the ID number of the appropriate sensor amplifier is set to 1. * For the FD-MH Series, the current value (instantaneous flow rate) is stored in the current value 0.
7
7-19

7
7-20
7-4

Send Receive

Receive Send
7
Reference
7-21


Scanner Command FD-MH DL-EP1
7
Response: 1234
<Details of command> Service code: 0EH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0325H (805) FD-MH Current values (instantaneous flow rate): 1234
7-22
Scanner Command: 1000 FD-MH DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 10H Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0345H(837) Service data: 1000 FD-MH Integrated flow rate setting value 1: 1501000
Response
"(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-45) (3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier Message communication issues operation commands such as integration reset to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Response
<Details of command> Service code: 4BH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0302H(770) Integration reset execution by FD-MH
7
Scanner Command FD-MH DL-EP1 <Details of command> Service code: 4CH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 00H Service data: 01H Changes using the sensor amplifier keys are locked.
Response
"(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 7-48)

7-23
Response
<Details of command> Service code: 4CH Class ID: 67H Instance ID: 01H Attribute ID: 0325H(805) Reads the number of decimal places of the FD-MH current values (instantaneous flow rate)
Reference
For the FD-MH Series, if the current value is 12.53 l/min, data is stored as follows: Data: 1253 Number of decimal places: 2
7
Number of decimal places
125312.5312.53 l/min
2 1
7-24

7
ID number 1 sensor Instance ID: 01H ID number 2 sensor Instance ID: 02H
7-25
Reference
* Some of the commands to be used may not require the above items.
7
"Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication" (Page 7-28)
7-26

EtherNet/IP unit
Command
Response
Object Name
Class ID
Reference Page
DL Object
67H
7-31
01H 02H
9-22 9-25
04H
9-26
06H F5H F6H
9-28 9-30 9-34
7
7-27

*1 For details on usable services, refer to 31) or Responses
7
Response format
Item General status Additional status Service response data Description Returns a general status in respect to the command (General Status). 00H is returned when the command ends normally. Returns the additional status (Additional Status). Returns service response data Service Response Data) in respect to the command.
7-28
7
7-29

(1) Instance ID (2) Attribute ID (3) Name (4) Description Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is set to ON. Bit 0 to bit 9 ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system (5) Attribute (6) Data Type
00H
74H (116)
Output 1
WORD
(5) Attribute
7
(6) Data type
7-30

Service Code Service Name Description Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service, refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-44). Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service, refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-45). Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier. Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the object. refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)" (Page 7-46). For examples of using this service, refer to "(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-46). Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code 09H is returned as a response. Setting 0: Not lock Setting 1: Key lock "Lock setting" (Page 7-32) For examples of using this service, refer to sensor amplifier operations" (Page 7-48). Acquisition of the number of decimal places *3 "(4) Locking
0EH
Parameter read
10H
Parameter write
4BH*1
Operation command
7
4CH
Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-49).
4DH
*1 This service cannot be used in the DL-EP1 (instance ID:00H). *2 This service cannot be used in the sensor amplifier (instance ID: 01H to 0AH) connected to the DL-EP1. *3 In the DL-EP1 (instance ID: 00H), this service can be used as the attribute ID 90H to 9EH and A0H to AEH.
7-31
Lock setting
0 1
0CH
7
0EH -
10H 13H 14H 16H

-

1FH
FEH
7-32
Attributes
Instance ID Attribute ID Name Description Indicates the status of this unit and connected sensor amplifier. bit0: DL-EP1 Error Status Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system bit14: Warning Status bit15: Error Status Indicates the error status of the connected senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned to ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned) Attribute Data Type
64H (100)
Status
WORD
65H (101)
Sensor Error Status
WORD
66H (102) 67H (103)
Warning Status
WORD
Reserved for system Indicates the status of current value 0 of each amplifier. If the current value 0 is 0ver Range", Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit corresponding to the ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned)
68H (104)
WORD
00H
WORD
7
R R R R UINT UINT UINT UINT
Reserved for system Indicates the output 1 status of each sensor amplifier. When output 1 is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
74H (116)
Output1
WORD
7-33
Instance ID
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates the output 2 status of each sensor amplifier. When output 2 is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system Indicates the output 3 status of each sensor amplifier. When output 3 is output, the bit corresponding to the ID number of the sensor amplifier is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned) (Unassigned)
Attribute
Data Type
75H (117)
Output2
WORD
76H (118)
Output3
WORD
77H (119) 78H (120) 79H (121) to 89H (137) 8AH (138)
Output4 (Unassigned) Output5 (Unassigned)
R R
WORD WORD
Reserved for system When the current value 0 of each amplifier is invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
WORD
00H
7
8BH (139)
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit Current Value 0 of the corresponding ID number is turned ON. Under Range Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system Current Value 0 Over Range Current Value 1 Invalid When the current value 0 of each amplifier is higher than the upper limit of the detection range, the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON. Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10 Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system (Unassigned)
WORD
8CH (140)
WORD
8DH (141) 8EH (142) 8FH (143) 90H (144) 91H (145) to 98H (152)
WORD
Current Value 1 (Unassigned) Under Range Current Value 1 Over Range Current Value 0 (ID01) (Unassigned) Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID number 1. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0) :
WORD
WORD
DINT
7-34
Instance ID
Attribute ID 99H (153) 9AH (154) to 9EH (158) 9FH (159) A0H (160) to AEH (174) AFH (175)
Name Current Value 0 (ID10) Current Value 0 (ID Number 11) to (ID Number 15)
Description Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID number 10. Parameter range: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
Attribute
Data Type
WORD
(Unassigned)
DINT
(Unassigned)
DINT
Reserved for system Set up the condition to determine if the sensor error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error (MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or warning occurs. Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0) 0: Not mask 1: Mask Indicates the number of connected sensor amplifiers. Parameter range: 0 to 10 (initial value: 0)
B0H (176)
R/W
UINT
00H B1H (177) B2H (178) to C7H (199) 0300H (768) 0301H (769) to 0309H (777) 030AH (778) 030BH (779) to 030FH (783) 0310H (784) to 04FFH (1279)
Reference
UINT
7
Reserved for system Error Code (ID number 00) : Error Code (ID number 10) Error Code (ID number 11) to (ID number 15)
UINT
UINT
(Unassigned)
Reserved for system
"Current
7-35
Attributes for FD-MH Series Designate the ID number (01H to 0AH) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.
Class Attribute ID 0320H (800) Name Group1 Entry count Description Indicates the group 1 entry count. Parameter range: 22 Indicates the error status of the sensor amplifier. Bit 2 : Overcurrent error (ErC) Bit 3 : EEPROM error (ErE) Bit 4 : The instantaneous flow rate remains 0. Bit 5 : Same as Bit 4 Bit 6 : Backflow error (rEv) Bit 8 : Temperature lower limit error Bit 9 : Temperature upper limit error Bit 10 : Temperature sensor connection error (Err tEMP) Other than the above: Fixed at 0 Attribute R Data Type DINT
0321H (801)
DWORD
0322H (802) to 0323H (803)
Reserved for system Control output Integration pulse output Abnormal alarm output status*2 Instantaneous flow rate (current value)*3
0324H (804)
Indicates the control output. Bit 0: Output 1 Bit 1: Output 2 Bit 2: Output 3 Other than the above: Fixed at 0 Indicates the instantaneous flow rate (current value). Parameter range: FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 99.99 FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 999.9 FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 999.9 FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 9999.9 Indicates the integrated flow rate. Parameter range: FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 4294967.29 FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 42949672.9 FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 42949672.9 FD-MH500A: 0 to 429496729 Indicates the instantaneous flow rate (peak hold value). Parameter range: FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 99.99 FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 999.9 FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 999.9 FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 9999.9 Indicates the instantaneous flow rate (bottom hold value). Parameter range: FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 99.99 FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 999.9 FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 999.9 FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 9999.9
DWORD
7
Group1 0325H (805)
DINT
0326H (806)
Integrated flow rate*4
DINT
0327H (807)
Instantaneous flow rate (peak hold value)*3
DINT
0328H (808)
Instantaneous flow rate (bottom hold value)*3
DINT
7-36
Class
Attribute ID 0329H (809) to 032AH (810) 032BH (811) 032CH (812) 032DH (813) 032EH (814) 032FH (815) 0330H (816) to 0333H (819) 0334H (820) 0335H (821) 0336H (822) 0337H (823) to 033FH (831) 0340H (832)
Name
Description
Attribute
Data Type
(Reserved for system) Indicates the bank switching status. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Bank A 1: Bank B
Bank switching status
DINT
(Reserved for system) Current temperature*5 Temperature peak hold value*5 Temperature peak hold value*5 Indicates the current temperature. Parameter range: 0.0 to 999.9 Indicates the temperature peak hold value. Parameter range: 0.0 to 999.9 Indicates the temperature bottom hold value. Parameter range: 0.0 to 999.9 R DINT
DINT
DINT
Group1
(Reserved for system) Indicates the external input status. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0:OFF 1:ON
External input status
DINT
(Reserved for system) Temperature sensor connection

*6
7
R DINT
Indicates the temperature sensor connection. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Not connected 1: Connected
(Reserved for system) Group2 Entry count Instantaneous flow rate setting value 1(P1)*7 Indicates the group 2 entry count. Parameter range: 8 Indicates the instantaneous flow rate setting value 1 (P1). Parameter range: FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 30.00 (initial value: 3.00) FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 100.0 (initial value: 15.0) FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 200.0 (initial value: 30.0) FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 999.9 (initial value: 100.0) Indicates the instantaneous flow rate setting value 2 (P2). Parameter range: FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 30.00 (initial value: 10.00) FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 100.0 (initial value: 50.0) FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 200.0 (initial value: 100.0) FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 999.9 (initial value: 200.0)
DINT
0341H (833) Group2
R/W
DINT
0342H (834)
Instantaneous flow rate setting value 2(P1)*7
R/W
DINT
7-37
Class
Attribute ID
Name Temperature upper limit setting value

*8
Description Indicates the temperature upper limit setting value. Parameter range: 0.1 to 99.9: Upper limit value (initial value: 80.0) 100.0: Upper limit detection invalid Indicates the temperature lower limit setting value. Parameter range: 0.1 to 99.9: Lower limit value (initial value: 5.0) 0.0: Lower limit detection invalid Indicates the integrated flow rate setting value 1. The value obtained by multiplying this value by the value set in integrated flow rate units serves as the actual integrated flow rate setting value. Parameter range: 0 to 9999 (initial value: 150) Indicates the integrated flow rate setting value 2. The value obtained by multiplying this value by the value set in integrated flow rate units serves as the actual integrated flow rate setting value. Parameter range: 0 to 9999 (initial value: 9999) Indicates the instantaneous flow rate setting value 3 (P3). Parameter range: FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 30.00 (initial value: 13.00) FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 100.0 (initial value: 65.0) FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 200.0 (initial value: 130.0) FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 999.9 (initial value: 400.0) Indicates the instantaneous flow rate setting value 4 (P4). Parameter range: FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 30.00 (initial value: 20.00) FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 100.0 (initial value: 100.0) FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 200.0 (initial value: 200.0) FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 999.9 (initial value: 500.0)
Attribute
Data Type
0343H (835)
R/W
DINT
0344H (836)
Temperature lower limit setting value

*9
R/W
DINT
0345H (837)
Integrated flow rate setting value 1
R/W
DINT
Group2
0346H (838)
Integrated flow rate setting value 2
R/W
DINT
0347H (839)
Instantaneous flow rate setting value 3 (P3)*7
R/W
DINT
7
0348H (840) Instantaneous flow rate setting value 4 (P4)*7
R/W
DINT
0349H (841) to 035FH (863) 0360H (864) 0361H (865) Group3 0362H (866) 0363H (867)
(Reserved for system) Group3 Entry count Key lock function Indicates the group 3 entry count. Parameter range: 5 Indicates the key lock function. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Key unlock (initial value) 1: Key lock
DINT
R/W
DINT
(Reserved for system) Analog output selection*10 Indicates the analog output selection. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Standard (initial value) 1: Free range analog
R/W
DINT
7-38
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates the free range analog upper limit. Parameter range: FD-MH10A: 0.0 to 30.0 (Initial value: 10.0, settable unit: 0.1) FD-MH50A: 0 to 100 (Initial value: 50, settable unit: 5) FD-MH100A: 0 to 200 (Initial value: 100, settable unit: 10) FD-MH500A: 0 to 1000 (Initial value: 500, settable unit: 50) Indicates the free range analog lower limit. Parameter range: FD-MH10A: 0.0 to 30.0 (Initial value: 0.0, settable unit: 0.1) FD-MH50A: 0 to 100 (Initial value: 0, settable unit: 5) FD-MH100A: 0 to 200 (Initial value: 0, settable unit: 10) FD-MH500A: 0 to 1000 (Initial value: 0, settable unit: 50)
Attribute
Data Type
0364H (868)
Free range analog upper limit*10
R/W
DINT
Group3 0365H (869) Free range analog lower limit*10
R/W
DINT
0366H (870) to 037FH (895) 0380H (896) 0381H (897)
(Reserved for system) Group4 Entry count Indicates the group 4 entry count. Parameter range: 29
DINT
(Reserved for system) Indicates the Detection mode. Parameter range: 0 to 4 0: F-1 (initial value) 1:F-2 2:F-3 3:A-1 4:A-2
7
R/W DINT
0382H (898)
Detection mode
0383H (899)
(Reserved for system) Indicates the response time. Parameter range: 0 to 6 0:0.5s 1:1.0s 2:2.5s 3:5.0s (initial value) 4:10.0s 5:30.0s 6:60.0s Indicates the display averaging. Parameter range: 0.0 to 10.0 (initial value: 1.0, settable unit: 0.5) Indicates the output 2 timeout time. Parameter range: 1 to 99 (initial value: 10) Indicates the integration direction. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Increment (initial value) 1: Decrement
Group4 0384H (900) Response time
R/W
DINT
0385H (901) 0386H (902) 0387H (903)
Display averaging*11 Output 2 timeout time Integration direction
R/W R/W
DINT DINT
R/W
DINT
7-39
Class
Attribute ID
Name
Description Indicates the integrated flow rate unit. Parameter range: 0 to 6 (initial value: 2) FD-MH10A: 0 to 4 FD-MH50A: 1 to 5 FD-MH100A: 1 to 5 FD-MH500A: 2 to 6
Attribute
Data Type
0388H (904)
Integrated flow rate unit
Parameter list 0:0.01 1:0.1 2:1 3:10 4:100 5:1000 6:10000
R/W
DINT
0389H (905) to 038CH (908) 038DH (909)
(Reserved for system) Indicates N.O./N.C. Bit 0: Output 1 (0:N.O./1:N.C.) (initial value: 0) Bit 1: Output 2 (0:N.O./1:N.C.) (initial value: 0) Bit 2: Output 3 (0:N.O./1:N.C.) (initial value: 0) Indicates display mode. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0:Std 1:rESo Initial value: FD-MH10A/FD-MH500A:0 FD-MH50A/FD-MH100A:1 Indicates hysteresis. Parameter range: FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 9.99 (initial value: 0.10) FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 49.9 (initial value: 0.5) FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 99.9 (initial value: 1.0) FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 499.9 (initial value: 5.0) Indicates the bank switching function. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: OFF (initial value) 1:ON
N.O./N.C.
R/W
DWORD
Group4
038EH (910)
Display mode
R/W
DINT
7
038FH (911) Hysteresis*7
R/W
DINT
0390H (912) 0391H (913) 0392H (914) 0393H (915) 0394H (916)
Bank switching function
R/W
DINT
(Reserved for system) Flow zero function Indicates the flow zero function. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: OFF (initial value) 1:ON
R/W
DINT
(Reserved for system) Different frequency mode Indicates different frequency mode. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Standard (initial value) 1: Different frequency mode
R/W
DINT
7-40
Class
Attribute ID 0395H (917) to 0396H (918) 0397H (919) 0398H (920) to 039CH (924) 039DH (925) 039EH (926) to 039FH (927) 03A0H (928) 03A1H (929)
Name
Description
Attribute
Data Type
(Reserved for system) Indicates eco mode. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Not use (initial value) 1: Use
Eco mode
R/W
DINT
Group4
(Reserved for system) Indicates the flow indicator display color. Parameter range: 0 to 1 0: Red when ON, green when OFF 1: Green when ON, red when OFF (initial value)
Flow indicator display color
R/W
DINT
(Reserved for system) Group5 Entry count Dry water error sensitivity Indicates the group 5 entry count. Parameter range: 2 Indicates the dry water sensitivity. Parameter range: 0 to 500 (initial value: 100)
R R/W
DINT DINT
Group5
03A2H (930) 03A3H (931) to 03BFH (959) 03C0H (960) 03C1H (961) 03C2H (962)
Dry water Indicates the dry water detection time. (The unit error is 100 ms.) detection time Parameter range: 31 to 255 (initial value: 100) (Reserved for system)
R/W
DINT
7
R R R DINT DINT DINT
Group6 Entry count Product code Revision
Indicates the group 6 entry count. Parameter range: 11 Indicates the product code. FD-MA*A: Main unit: 4004 FD-MA*A: Expansion unit: 4005 Indicates the revision. Parameter range: 0101H to FFFFH
Group6
03C3H (963)
Indicates the connected sensor head. Parameter range: 0 to 3 Connected 0:FD-MH10A *6 1:FD-MH50A sensor head 2:FD-MH100A 3:FD-MH500A Reserved for system Product name*11 Indicates the product name. "FD-MA*A"
DINT
03C4H (964) to 03C7H (967) 03C8H (968)
STRING
7-41
Class
Attribute ID 03C9H (969) to 03D6H (982) 03D7H (983) 03D8H (984) 03D9H (985) 03DAH (986) to 03DFH (991)
Name
Description
Attribute
Data Type
Reserved for system Indicates the series code. FD-MA*A: Main unit: 4004 FD-MA*A: Expansion unit: 4005 Indicates the series version. Parameter range: 1 Indicates the device type. Parameter range: 0
Series code Series version Device type
R R R
DINT DINT DINT
Reserved for system
*1
*2 *3
7
Communicating with FD-MH Series *4
*5
*6 *7 *8
*9
You can check the error contents of the sensor amplifier according to the ON/ OFF status of each bit. OFF(0): No error occurred. ON(1): An error occurred. Two or more errors may simultaneously occur. For details on each error, refer to "FD-MH Series User's Manual". You can check the detailed output status according to the ON/OFF status of each bit. If the instantaneous flow rate exceeds the upper limit of the display range (if the display is "FFFF"), data becomes an undefined value that exceeds the upper limit of the display range. If the sensor amplifier display is ErH, ErS, or rEv or if the sensor head is in the dry water status, data becomes "0". Without reference to the display mode set in the sensor amplifier, data for rESo mode is used. Data is read in minimum display units without reference to the integration display unit set in the sensor amplifier. If the integration flow rate exceeds the upper limit, data retains the upper limit. If the temperature sensor is not connected, data becomes "0". If the temperature exceeds the upper limit of the display (if the temperature display is "FFFF"), data becomes an undefined value that exceeds the upper limit of the temperature display. If the sensor amplifier display is ErH, data immediately before ErH is retained. Without reference to the display mode set in the sensor amplifier, data becomes identical to the data within the range that can be set in "rESo" mode. If 100.0 is written, no warning is issued even if data exceeds the upper limit of the display temperature range. A warning is issued only when data is less than the lower limit. If 0.0 is written, no warning is issued even if data becomes less than the lower limit of the display temperature range. A warning is issued only when data is greater than or equal to the upper limit.
7-42
*10
*11
If "analog output selection" is set to "standard", the free range analog becomes invalid even if "free range analog upper limit" or "free range analog lower limit" is rewritten. The read character string is stored as ASCII code. For "FD-M": 4d2d4446H
7
7-43
Using DL Object

Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 0EH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Commands Item Description Designates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). Designates the ID number. Designates the attribute ID to be read from "Attribute". There is no service data. Data Example 0EH 67H 0AH 0324H(804) -
7
Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data
7-44

Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 10H is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Description Designates "Parameter write (10H)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). Designates the ID number. Designates the attribute ID to be written from "Attribute". Writes the setting. Data Example Communicating with FD-MH Series 10H 67H 05H 0347H(839) 0064H
General status
00H
7-45

Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4BH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command) The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected. The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected. Attribute ID 0302H(770) 0303H(771) 0304H(772) 0305H(773) Name Integration flow rate reset request Reset during hold (flow) Reset during hold (temperature) Initial reset request Description Resets the integration flow rate. Resets the instantaneous flow hold. Resets the temperature hold Restores all the sensor amplifier settings to the default settings.
7
7-46
Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Description Designates the "operation command (4BH)" (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Designates the ID number. The ID number (00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated. Designates the attribute ID to be designated from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)" (Page 7-46) There is no service response data. Data Example 4BH 67H 08H
Attribute ID
0301H(769)
Service Data
Responses (when unsuccessful) Item General status Additional status Service response data Description A general status for the service is returned An additional status is returned. There is no service response data. Data Example
7
Communicating with FD-MH Series 08H -
7-47

Responses (when successful)
7
Item General status Service response data
Description Message communication has ended normally. There is no service response data.
Data Example 00H -
Point
If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to the DLEP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensor amplifier are not changed).
7-48
Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. Service code 4DH is used. The following settings are required to use this object. Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Commands Item Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Service Data Description Designates parameter read (fixed value). Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). Designates the ID number. Designates the attribute ID to be read from "Attribute". There is no service data. Data Example 4DH 67H 01H 0325H (805) -
7
7-49
MEMO
7
7-50
Specifications
8-1 8-2 8-3
Specifications ..................................................... 8-2 Data Processing Time ........................................ 8-3 Dimensions......................................................... 8-5
8-1
8-1
Specifications
The specifications of the DL-EP1 are as follows:

Product name Model Compliant standards Transmission rate Ethernet specifications Transmission medium Maximum cable length Maximum number of connectable hubs Compatible functions Number of connections RPI (Transmission cycle) Tolerable communication bandwidth for cyclic communication Conformance test Sensor connection specifications Connectable sensors Number of connectable sensor units Indicators EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 IEEE802.3 (10BASE-T) IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX) 10Mbps (10BASE-T) 100Mbps (100BASE-TX) STP cable or Category 3 or higher UTP cable (10BASE-T) STP cable or Category 5 or higher UTP cable (100BASE-TX) 100 m (Distance between DL-EP1 and Ethernet switch) 4 (10BASE-T) 2 (100BASE-TX) Cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) Message communication (Explicit messaging) Compatible with UCMM and Class 3 64 0.5 to 10000 ms (0.5 ms unit) 6000pps Compatible with Version A7 Sensor amplifiers with D-bus support*1 Up to 15 units*2 Link/activity indicator (LINK/ACT) :Green LED Module status indicator (MS) :2-color (green/red) LED Network status indicator (NS) :2-color (green/red) LED Sensor communication indicator (D-bus) 2-color (green/red) LED Including 20 to 30 VDC ripple (p-p) 10% (This voltage is supplied from the connected sensor amplifer) 1500 mW or less (at 30 V 50 mA max) -20 to +55 C (no freezing) 35 to 85% RH (no condensation) 10 to 55 Hz compound amplitude 1.5 mm, 2 hours each in X, Y, Z directions 2 Main unit case: Polycarbonate Approx. 70g
EtherNet/IP specifications
Power voltage Power consumption Operating ambient air temperature Environmental resistance Operating ambient air humidity Vibration resistance
8
Specifications
Pollution degree Materials Weight
*1 *2
D-bus is the name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving system for sensor amplifiers. The number of connectable sensor units varies with the sensor amplifiers to be connected.
8-2
8-2
Data Processing Time
This section describes the length of time that lasts from detection by a sensor to data processing by PLC.
CPU unit EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Maximum data processing time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) (1) PLC scan time (2) RPI (Transmission cycle) (3) DL-EP1 data communication time (4) Sensor amplifier response time (2) RPI is set with the scanner unit. It can be set in 0.5 ms increments between 0.5 ms and 10000 ms. (3) DL-EP1 data communication time The time required for sending outputs and current value data from a sensor amplifier to the DL-EP1 is as follows: Sensor amplifier with calculation function OFF, or sensor amplifier with no calculation function
Number of connected sensor amplifiers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Output, comparator value, or current value Other than IG Series* 7.8 ms 9.8 ms 13.8 ms 15.8 ms 19.8 ms 21.8 ms 25.8 ms 27.8 ms 31.8 ms 33.8 ms 37.8 ms 39.8 ms 43.8 ms 45.8 ms 49.8 ms IG Series 5.8 ms 10.8 ms 12.8 ms 16.8 ms -
8
Specifications
* For the GT2-100, 50 ms is added to the values in the table.

8-3
8-2 Data Processing Time
Sensor amplifier with calculation function ON

Number of connected sensor amplifiers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Output, comparator value, or current value Other than IG Series* 11.3 ms 14.3 ms 20.3 ms 23.3 ms 29.3 ms 32.3 ms 38.3 ms 41.3 ms 47.3 ms 50.3 ms 56.3 ms 59.3 ms 65.3 ms 68.3 ms 74.3 ms IG Series 5.8 ms 10.8 ms 12.8 ms 16.8 ms -
* For the GT2-100, 75 ms is added to the values in the table. For details on the PLC scan time in (1) and the sensor amplifier response time in (4), refer to the manual of each unit.
8
Specifications
8-4
8-3
Dimensions
(Unit : mm) 25.6
(42.5) 38.1
29.4
43.5 94.5
35.4
8
Specifications
8-5
MEMO
8
Specifications
8-6
Appendix
9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7
Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers ..................... 9-2 Device Profile...................................................... 9-5 Troubleshooting .................................................. 9-6 Default Settings .................................................. 9-8 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC ............................................... 9-9 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ............................... 9-20 Index................................................................. 9-39
9-1
9-1
Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers
Connectable Sensor Amplifiers

As of July 15, 2010
Name Amplifier Form DIN rail mount type Panel mount type Large display type DIN rail mount type Panel mount type DIN rail mount type Panel mount type DIN rail mount type Panel mount type DIN rail mount type Main Unit GT2-71(M)(C)N GT2-71(M)(C)P GT2-75N GT2-75P GT2-100N GT2-100P GT-71A GT-71AP GT-75A GT-75AP IG-1000 IG-1500 IB-1000 IB-1500 FD-MA1A FD-MA1AP Expansion Unit GT2-72(C)N GT2-72(C)P GT2-76N GT2-76P GT-72A GT-72AP GT-76A GT-76AP IG-1050 IG-1550 IB-1050 IB-1550 FD-MA2A FD-MA2AP Maximum Number of Connectable Units 15 (1 main unit, 14 expansion units) 15 (1 main unit, 14 expansion units) 1 (1 main unit)*3 10 (1 main unit, 9 expansion units) 10 (1 main unit, 9 expansion units) 4 (1 main unit, 3 expansion units)
High-precision contact type digital sensor GT2 series General-purpose contact type digital sensor GT-70A series*1 Multi-purpose CCD laser micrometer IG Series Transmissive Laser Discrimination Sensor IB Series Electromagnetic Digital Flow Sensor FD-MH Series*2
4 (1 main unit, 3 expansion units)
10 (1 main unit, 9 expansion units)
*1 *2 *3
This sensor cannot be connected to the GT-70 Series. This sensor cannot be connected to a panel mount type. For the large display type, up to 11 sensor heads can be connected by adding head expansion boards to a main unit.
9
Appendix
9-2
9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers
Mixed Connection of Sensor amplifiers

Different types of sensor amplifiers can be connected to the DL-EP1. However, connect sensor amplifiers within the following restrictions:
Restrictions on sensor amplifier connection

GT2-7 GT2-7 GT-7A IG IB FD-MH Yes Yes Yes No GT-7A Yes Yes Yes No IG Yes Yes Yes No IB Yes Yes Yes No FD-MH No No No No -
Yes: This combination is available. No: This combination is not available. GT2-100 cannot have a mixed connection with any other types of sensor amplifiers. If GT2-7, GT-7A, IG, or IB has a mixed connection with any other types of sensor amplifiers, the calculation function and simultaneous input function cannot be used. If there is even one combination to which a mixed connection is inapplicable among combinations of connected sensor amplifiers, the DL-EP1 will result in a "mixed model error (54)".
Restrictions on the number of connectable sensor amplifiers combination of GT2 series, GT-70A series, IG series, and IB series
Combination GT2-7 (main and expansion units) Yes Yes Not connected Not connected Yes GT-7A (main and expansion units) Yes Not connected Yes Not connected Yes IG or IB (main and expansion units) Not connected Yes Yes Combination of IG and IB Yes Up to 6 units in total* For the IG or IB, however, up to 4 units can be connected. Maximum number of units (indicated by Yes) that can be connected Up to 10 units in total
9
Appendix
* For combinations of seven or more units, contact your nearest KEYENCE office. Combination of FD-MH series Limit the total number of units to be connected to 4 or less.
9-3
9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers
Current limitation check Current limitation check is a function that checks whether expansion units can be used within rating by checking the amount of current that each unit can pass. This function checks whether the total consumption current of downstream units is less than or equal to the allowable current of each unit.
Upstream Main unit GT2-71N ID number 1 Expansion unit GT2-72A ID number 2 Expansion unit GT2-72A ID number 3 Downstream Expansion unit DL-EP1 ID number 0
(1) Allowable Current (1) Allowable Current (1) Allowable Current (1) Allowable Current 400 400 400 (2) Total current consumed 94 24V (3) Consumption current 37 (2) Total current consumed 57 + (3) Consumption current 37 (2) Total current consumed 20 + (3) Consumption current 37 (2) Total current consumed + (3) Consumption current 20
(1)>(2) OK
(1)>(2) OK
(1)>(2) OK
(1)>(2) OK
The following values are used as the allowable current and consumption current of each sensor.
Model DL-EP1 Allowable Current 400 400 300 300 400 Consumption Current 20 37* 32 64 21 37
9
Appendix
GT2 Series GT-70A Series IG Series IB Series FD-MH Series
* For the GT2 Series, if nine sensor amplifiers or more are connected, use 27 as consumption current for calculation.
9-4
9-2
Device Profile
Category Vendor name Vendor ID General status Device type Revision Product code Product name
Item 367
Description Keyence Corporation 0 (Generic Device) 1.1 4501 DL-EP1
9
Appendix
9-5
9-3
Troubleshooting
The indicator LEDs on the DL-EP1 can be used to determine the causes of errors.
Link/activity indicator (Green) Module status indicator (Green) Network status indicator (Green) Sensor communication indicator (Green)
Link/activity indicator (LINK/ACT) This indicator indicates whether the DL-EP1 is communicating correctly.
LED Status Solid Green Flashing Condition The DL-EP1 is normally linked. The DL-EP1 is normally linked and is now exchanging data. Check if the power supply is correctly connected. Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected to the sensor amplifier. Check if the IP address is correct. Check if the power supply of the connected device or Ethernet switch is correctly connected. Check if the cable is correctly connected. Corrective Action
Not lit
Power is not supplied to the DLEP1. The DL-EP1 is not linked.
Module status indicator (MS) This indicator indicates whether the DL-EP1 is operating normally.
LED Status Condition The DL-EP1 is normally operating. A system error may have occurred Contact your nearest KEYENCE office. in the DL-EP1. One or more of the connector sensors are in the error or warning status*. Flashing The number of connected sensor may have exceed the maximum number of connectable units. One or more of the connector sensors are in the error or warning status*. Check if the number of connected sensors is less than or equal to the maximum number of connectable units. Check if the power supply is correctly connected. Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected to the sensor amplifier. Corrective Action
9
Appendix
Green Solid Solid
Red
The IP address may be duplicated. Check if the IP address is duplicated. Not lit Power is not supplied to the DLEP1.
* The setting can be changed so that the red LED does not flash.
9-6
9-3 Troubleshooting
Network status indicator (NS) This indicator indicates whether the DL-EP1 is communicating correctly with EtherNet/IP.
LED Status Green Solid Flashing Solid Red Flashing Condition One or more connections are normally established. No connection is established. A duplicated IP address was detected. One or more connections have timed out. Power is not supplied to the DL-EP1. The IP address is not assigned. Corrective Action If multiple connections are used, the DL-EP1 may be unable to communicate with EtherNet/IP even if the green LED is solid. Check if the DL-EP1 is registered in the scanner. Check if the IP address setting is duplicated with the IP address setting of the scanner or other adaptors. Locate the connections that have timed out and check the power status and wiring of the communication device. Check if the power supply is correctly connected. Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected to the sensor amplifier. Set the IP address.
Not lit
Sensor communication indicator (D-bus) This indicator indicates whether the DL-EP1 is communicating correctly with the sensor amplifier. If an error occurs, you can identify the cause of the error by reading the error code via cyclic communication or message communication. "Error code list" (Page 3-13)
LED Status Condition After it has started up, the DL-EP1 automatically shifts to the normal status. Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected to the sensor amplifier and turn on the power again. Check if an unsupported sensor amplifier is connected to the DL-EP1 and turn on the power again. If the error cannot be recovered after checking the above, contact your nearest Keyence office. Check if the number of connected sensor amplifiers exceeds the maximum number of connectable units. Check if there is an electrical noise source around the DL-EP1. Corrective Action
The DL-EP1 is communicating correctly with Solid green the sensor amplifier. Flashing After power-on, the DL-EP1 is now starting green up. The DL-EP1 could not communicate with the sensor amplifier during its start-up. (Error ID number/code: 00H/52 or 00H/55) An attempt to assign an ID number has failed. (Error ID number/code: 00H/51) Solid red The DL-EP1 could not communicate continuously with the sensor amplifier for one second or longer. (Error ID number/code: 00H/57) A system error may have occurred in the DL-EP1. A current limitation error occurred. Flashing (Error ID number/code: 00H/56) red An unsupported sensor amplifier was Repetition connected. of 4 (Error ID number/code: 00H/53) consecutive Unconnectable models are mixed. (Error ID flashes) number/code: 00H/54) Flashing red Sometimes the DL-EP1 cannot temporarily (Flashing at communicate with the sensor amplifier. fixed (Error ID number/code: 00H/57) intervals) Not lit Power is not supplied to the DL-EP1.
9
Appendix
Check the sensor amplifier configuration.
Check if there is an electrical noise source around the DL-EP1. (The error is automatically reset if the cause is removed.) Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected to the sensor amplifier. Check if the power supply is correctly connected.
9-7
9-4
Default Settings
The DL-EP1 can be reset and initialized to the default settings by holding down the reset switch ( Page 1-4) for three seconds or longer or by using the Identity Object Reset service ( Page 9-24) for message communication. The DL-EP1 default settings are as follows:
Setting Item Communication speed IP address setting method IP address Netmask Default gateway Sensor status mask setting Multicast TTL Multicast assignment method Number of multicast addresses Multicast address BOOTP 0.0.0.0* 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 MS LED flashes in red when a sensor error or warning occurs. 1 0 (Automatic) 32 239.255.0.0 Value after Initialization 10/100 Mbps automatic
* Only the BOOTP client function can be used when the IP address is 0.0.0.0. The IP address must be set to use any other functions.
9
Appendix
9-8
9-5
Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
This section explains the procedures for communicating with the DL-EP1 using an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC (EtherNet/IP scanner).
Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

The DL-EP1 is capable of the following communication when connected to an AllenBradley ControlLogix PLC. Cyclic communication function maximum data size: 496 bytes Message communication function: Class3/UCMM
Changing the cyclic communication settings Refer to the PLC instruction manual for details on the PLC unit configuration and settings such as RsLinx, required for communicating with the PC.
Select the EIP communication module (1756-ENBT) connected with the DL-EP1 from RsLogix500 I/O Configuration, and then select "New Module" with a right click.
9
Appendix
9-9
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
Add "ETHERNET-MODULE (Generic Ethernet Module)".
Change the settings as required.
9
Appendix
Name Choose a name. The following tags are generated based on the name set here, and are used as the data exchanged with cyclic communication. (Name): I Data received from DL-EP1 (Name): O Data sent to DL-EP1 (Name): C Not used. Comm Format Designate [Data INT]. IP Address Designate the DL-EP1's IP address. Input (DL-EP1 send data size) Instance number: 100 (decimal) Data size: Value up to 84 Output (DL-EP1 receive data size) Instance number 101 (decimal) Data size: Value up to 5 Configuration Instance number: 1 (decimal) Data size: 0
9-10
Reference
For the details of InputOnly connection, refer to multiple PLCs (InputOnly)" (Page 9-11).
"Sending data to
Refer to "Usable Connections" (Page 3-7) for details on the connection. RPI Designate the cyclic communication interval.
Designate a value between 0.5 and 3200 ms.
Download the settings to the PLC. EtherNet/IP communication is enabled after the settings are downloaded and the status is switched to online. Sending data to multiple PLCs (InputOnly) By connecting to multiple PLCs with the InputOnly connection format, multiple PLCs can receive the data sent from the DL-EP1. Each PLC must be set as shown below to use the InputOnly connection. Bidirectional Communication PLC (maximum 1 unit) User set value No. 100 (decimal) User set value No. 101 (decimal) User set value Data-INT PLC Connected with InputOnly Same value as left Same value as left Appendix Same value as left No. 254 (decimal) 0 bite Input Data INT
Setting Item RPI value InputAssembly Instance number InputAssembly data size OutputAssembly Instance number OutputAssembly data size Comm Format
9-11
Point
To carry out cyclic communication with multiple PLCs using the InputOnly connection, the DL-EP1 input data must be sent as a Multicast packet. With ControlLogix, the DL-EP1 transmission is fixed to Multicast packet. However, caution is required when using devices, such as KV or SYSMAC, for which the connection method can be selected from Multicast or Point to Point.
Changing the message communication settings After completing "Changing the cyclic communication settings" (Page 9-9), issue the MSG instruction from the ladder program to execute message communication.)
Reference
Refer to "Logix500 Controllers General Instructions" (1756-RM003) for details on the MSG instructions. Select Inhibit Module when not using cyclic communication.
9
Appendix
Define the following tags under the RsLogix5000 "Controller Tags" field.
Tag for storing control information for MSG instruction (message- Message type) Tag for storing data exchanged with MSG instruction (tx_param, rx_param INT type)
9-12
Add the MSG instruction to the RsLogix5000 ladder.
Open the "Configuration" tab in the Message instruction setting dialog, and change the MSG instruction setting.
Message Type Select "CIP Generic". ServiceType, Class, Instance, Attribute Designate a value which matches the message to be sent. Example 1: Writing data to DL Object "Bank 0 HIGH setting" when writing data to attributes Item ServiceType ServiceCode Class Instance Attribute SourceElement SourceLength Destination Setting Value SetAttributeSingle - (Cannot be designated) 67H 01H 0341H Name of tag storing send data 4 byte (attribute size is 4) - (Cannot be designated)
9
Appendix
9-13
Example 2: Retrieving DL Object "Output 3 (GO)" data when reading attributes Item ServiceType ServiceCode Class Instance Attribute SourceElement SourceLength Destination Setting Value GetAttributeSingle - (cannot be designated) 67H 02H 76H - (cannot be designated) - (cannot be designated) Name of tag storing received data.
Open the "Communication" tab, and change the MSG communication settings.
Path Designate the device name set in "Configuration for cyclic communication". (An example for the DLEP1 device is shown above.)
9 5
Appendix
Connected, Cache Connections For UCMM connection: Invalidate bidirectional (default setting) For Class3 connection: Validate bidirectional Describe the process for setting the send data and retrieving the receive data with the ladder program, and download it to the PLC.
9-14
Procedures for Communication with an Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 PLC

The DL-EP1 is capable of the following communication when connected to an AllenBradley SLC5/05 PLC. Message communication function: Class3
Point
The size of attribute ID used for SLC5/05 Series is 1 byte or smaller. The SLC5/05 Series does not support the parameter which contains 2 byte attribute ID.
Reference
The SLC5/05 Series does not support the cyclic communication function, but by accessing the DL-EP1's Assembly Object with messages, control can be executed with the same data type and procedures as cyclic communication. Up to 248 bytes can be exchanged with the SLC5/05 series message communication. Do not exceed this size when exchanging data with message communication. The Assembly Object data size is the same as the cyclic communication data size set in the DL-EP1 properties. When using the SLC5/05, confirm that this value is 248 bytes.
9
Appendix
9-15
Changing the message communication configuration Message communication is carried out with a ladder program using EEM instructions.
Reference
Refer to the "SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference Manual" (1747-RM001), etc., for details on the EEM instructions.
Define the following file in the RsLogix500 "Data Files" field.
File storing EEM instruction control information (message-Integer type) File storing data exchanged with EEM instruction (tx_param, rx_param Integer type)
2 9
Appendix
Add EEM instruction to RsLogix500 ladder.
9-16
Designate the File used in the EEM instruction defined in Step 1 for the EEM instruction Control Block, and open the SetupScreen.
Service, Class, Instance, Attribute Designate a value which matches the message to be sent. Example 1: Retrieving DL Object "Output 3 (GO)" data when reading attributes Item ServiceType ServiceCode Class Instance Attribute Data Table Address (Send data) Size In Words (Send data) Data Table Address (Received data) Size In Words (Received data) Setting Value Generic Set Attribute Single - (Cannot be designated) 67H 02H 76H - (Cannot be designated) - (Cannot be designated) Name of file storing send data 1 word (attribute size is 1)
9
Appendix
9-17
Example 2: To control with same format and procedure as set cycle data, Access the Assembly Object attribute3: data. 1) Retrieving the DL-EP1 input data
Item Service ServiceCode Class Instance Attribute Data Table Address (Send data) Size In Words (Send data) Data Table Address (Received data) Size In Words (Received data) Value of file storing send data Setting Value ReadAssembly 0EHex (Cannot be designated) 04Hex (Cannot be designated) 64Hex (Monitor Data) 03Hex (Cannot be designated) (Cannot be designated) (Cannot be designated) Name of file storing send data 84 words Data following the format assigned to the DL-EP1 set cycle data communication allocation can be retrieved.
* The message exchanged with SLC5/05 can have up to 124 words (248 bytes). Confirm that the cyclic communication data size is set to 248 in the DL-EP1 properties. 2) Setting the DL-EP1 output data
Item Service ServiceCode Class Instance Attribute Data Table Address (Send data) Size In Words (Send data) Data Table Address (Received data) Size In Words (Received data) Value of file storing send data Setting Value WriteAssembly 10Hex (Cannot be designated) 04Hex (Cannot be designated) 65Hex (External Input) 03Hex (Cannot be designated) Name of file storing send data 5 words (Cannot be designated) (Cannot be designated) Designate with data having a format following the DL-EP1 set cycle data communication allocation.
9
Appendix
* The message exchanged with SLC5/05 can have up to 124 words (248 bytes). Confirm that the cyclic communication data size is set to 248 in the DL-EP1 properties.
9-18
Open the "MultiHop" tab, and set the DL-EP1 IP address.
The above screen is an example of when the DL-EP1 IP address is 192.168.0.10.
Open the "Send Data" tab and "Receive Data" tab, and check the contents of the file containing the send and receive data.
Describe the process for setting the send data and retrieving the receive data in a ladder program, and download it to the PLC.
9
Appendix
9-19
9-6
This section describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.
List of Usable Objects

The DL-EP1 can use the following objects:
Object Name Identity Object Message Router Object Assembly Object Connection Manager Object DL Object TCP/IP Interface Object Ethernet Link Object 1(01H) 2(02H) 4(04H) 6(06H) 103(67H) 245(F5H) 246(F6H) Class ID 1(01H) 1(01H) 100(64H) to 101(65H) 1(01H) 0(00H) to 15(0FH) 1(01H) 1(01H) Instance ID
For details on DL Object, refer to "DL Object" of each sensor amplifier. GT2 Series (Page 3-31) GT-70A Series (Page 4-31) IG Series (Page 5-33) IB Series (Page 6-33) FD-MH Series (Page 7-31)
9
Appendix
9-20
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
Reading Each Object Table

Reading class attributes and instance attributes Example) Excerpt from DL Object class attributes
(1)
Attribute ID 01H Item (1) Attribute ID (2) Name (3) Description (4) Attribute (5) Data type (6) Parameter range Indicates the attribute name. Describes the attribute. Indicates the direction of services for the attribute ID. R (read): Get_Attribute_Single or Get_Attributes_All can be used to read attribute values. W (Write): Set_Attribute_Single can be used to write an attribute value. Indicates the attribute data type. Indicates the data to be read from attributes or the range of parameters that can be set.
(2)
Name Vendor ID
(3)
Description Indicates the vendor ID.
(4)
Attribute R Description
(5)
Data Type UINT
(6)
Parameter Range 367
Indicates the attribute ID in hexadecimal notation.
Data type The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:
Range Data Type INT UINT USINT UDINT WORD DWORD BYTE SHORT_STRING Description Minimum Signed 16-bit integer Unsigned 16-bit integer Unsigned 8-bit integer Unsigned 32-bit integer Bit string: 16 bits Bit string: 32 bits Bit string: 8 bits Character string (1-byte length information + 1-byte array per character) Character string (2-byte length information + 1-byte array per character) -32768 0 0 0 Maximum 32767 65535 255 232-1 -
9
Appendix
STRING
9-21

Identity Object
Identity Object (Class ID: 01H)

This object provides DL-EP1 identification information, general information and a reset service, etc. Class Class service This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Get_Attributes_All (01H). Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)
Attribute ID 01H 02H 03H 06H Name Revision Max Instance Number of Instances Maximum ID Number Class Attributes Maximum ID Number Instance Attributes Description Object revision Maximum instance number Number of instances in generated object Maximum attribute ID of class attribute Maximum attribute ID of instance attribute Attribute R R R R Data Type UINT UINT UINT UINT Parameter Range 0001H 0001H 0001H 0007H
07H
UINT
0007H
Instance Instance service This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH), Get_Attributes_All (01H), and Reset service (05H). For details on Reset service, refer to Instance attribute (instance ID: 01H) "Reset service" (Page 9-24).
9
Appendix
Attribute ID 01H 02H 03H
Name Vendor ID Device Type Product Code Revision
Description Vendor identification number General device type Product identification code Identity object revision Major revision Minor revision DL-EP1 status Serial number Product name
Attribute R R R R
Data Type UINT UINT UINT Structure USINT USINT
Parameter Range 016FH 0000 1195H 01H 01H Reference 1 Serial number DL-EP1
04H 05H 06H 07H
Major Revision Minor Revision Status Serial Number Product Name
R R R
WORD UDINT SHORT_ STRING
9-22

Identity Object
Reference 1) Details of status (16 bits)

Bit 0 1 2 3 Owned Reserved Reserved Reserved Name Description ON: This bit is set to ON when one or more class1 or class3 connections are established. Always OFF. Always ON. Always OFF. Bits 4 to 7 are set according to the DL-EN1 status as follows: 0101(1): The DL-EP1 is in the unrecoverable fault status (1). 0010(2): The DL-EP1 is not (1) and one or more connections have timed out. 0011(3): The DL-EP1 is neither (1) or (2) and no connection is established. 0110(4): The DL-EP1 is not (1), (2), or (3) and there is one or more connections that are in the RUN status. 0111: The DL-EP1 is in a status other than (1) to (4). Always OFF. Always OFF. ON: This bit is set to ON when a recoverable unit error occurs. The red MS LED flashes. ON: This bit is set to ON when an unrecoverable unit error (EEPROM read error, etc.) occurs. The red MS LED is lit. Always OFF.
4 to 7
Extended Device Status
8 9 10 11 12 to 15
Minor Recoverable Fault Minor Unrecoverable Fault Major Recoverable Fault Major Unrecoverable Fault Reserved
9
Appendix
9-23

Identity Object
Reset service The Reset service is a CIP standard function used to emulate the same operations as power restart as much as possible. When it accepts this service, the DL-EP1 stops each function, interrupts communication, and reads the settings again. The Reset service is used as a restart request for reflecting changed parameters (e.g., IP address, Ethernet communication speed, etc.). Execute this service by designating 01H as the Instance ID of the Identity object.
Point
The commands received during Reset processing may be discarded. The response for the Reset ser vice is returned before the DL-EP1 starts reset processing.
Service Code
Service Name
Service Data (1 Byte) 00H: Emulates power reset. (Initial value) 01H: Restores the default settings and emulates power reset.
05H
Reset
For details on the default settings, refer to "Default Settings" (Page 9-8). If the DL-EP1 receives the Reset service when 02H or higher is set, 03H (Invalid parameter value) is returned as the CIP error code.
List of general and additional statuses returned to each service

General Status 00H 05H 00H Reset 03H 05H 00H Get_Attribute_ Single Others 05H 14H 08H Additional (Extended) Status -
Service Get_Attributes_ All
Description The service has ended normally. The designated instance ID does not exist. The service has ended normally. The designated reset method is incorrect. The designated instance ID does not exist. The service has ended normally. The designated instance ID does not exist. The designated attribute ID does not exist. The designated service is not supported.
9
Appendix
9-24
9-6Objects Usable by DL-EP1

Message Router Object (Class ID: 02H)

This object provides connection points for message communication. Class Class service This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH). Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)
Attribute ID 01H 02H 03H 06H Name Revision Max Instance Number of Instances Maximum ID Number Class Attributes Maximum ID Number Instance Attributes Description Object revision Maximum instance number Number of instances in generated object Maximum attribute ID of class attribute Maximum attribute ID of instance attribute Attribute R R R R Data Type UINT UINT UINT UINT Parameter Range 0001H 0001H 0001H 0007H
07H
UINT
0002H
Instance Instance service This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH). Instance attribute (instance ID: 01H)
Attribute ID Name Object_list Number 01H Classes Class ID list UNITtype array Description Supported object list Number of classes supported in class array Attribute R Data Type Structure UINT Parameter Range 0007H 0001H 0002H 0004H 0006H 00F5H 00F6H 0067H 0040H
9
Appendix
02H
Number Available
Maximum number of connections
UINT
9-25


Name General Status 00H Get_Attribute_Single Others 05H 14H 08H Additional (Extended) Status Description The service has ended normally. The designated instance ID does not exist. The designated attribute ID does not exist. The designated service is not supported.
Assembly Object (Class ID: 04H)

This object directly accesses and controls the data, which is exchanged via cyclic communication, via message communication. This object can be used to send data to the devices that do not support cyclic communication. Class Class service This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH). Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)
Attribute ID 01H Name Revision Description Object revision Attribute R Data Type UINT Parameter Range 0002H
Instance Instance service This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Set_Attribute_Single (10H).
9
Appendix
Instance attribute (instance ID: 64H to 65H) The instance ID is assigned when it is used to set a tag. Instance ID: 64H to 65H
Attribute ID Name Description Data assigned to Instance ID Number of bytes assigned to Instance ID Attribute Data Type BYTE array UINT Parameter Range Number of bytes assigned to instance ID*1*2 Set size assigned to instance ID (byte unit)
03H
Data
R/W
04H
Size
*1 Reading with Get_Attribute_Single ensures synchronism in instance ID units.
9-26

Assembly Object
*2 For details on the data assigned to each instance ID, refer to "monitor data" (instance ID: 64H) and "external input" (instance ID: 65H) of each sensor amplifier. GT2 Series(Page 3-30) GT-70A Series(Page 4-29) IG Series(Page 5-31) IB Series(Page 6-31) FD-MH Series(Page 7-29) List of general and additional statuses returned to each service
Name General Status 00H Get_Attribute_Single 05H 14H 00H 05H 08H 0CH 0EH 14H 15H Others 08H Additional (Extended) Status Description The service has ended normally. The designated instance ID does not exist. The designated attribute ID does not exist. The service has ended normally. The designated instance ID does not exist. The instance ID whose attribute is read (R) was designated. An attempt was made to execute the service for the instance during cyclic communication. The designated attribute ID cannot be written. The designated attribute ID does not exist. An attempt was made to write the data larger than the defined size. The designated service is not supported.
Set_Attribute_Single
9
Appendix
9-27

Connection Manager Object (Class ID: 06H)

This object is used for connection-type communication. Use this to establish a connection for the DL-EP1. Class Class service/class attribute There is no class service and attribute. Instance Instance service This object supports Forward_Close (4EH) and Forward_Open (54H). For details on instance services, refer to the CIP Specifications. Instance attribute There is no instance attribute. List of general and additional statuses returned to each service
Name General Status 00H Forward_ Close 04H 05H 13H 00H Additional (Extended) Status 0100H 0103H Description The service has ended normally. An attribute ID was designated. The designated instance ID does not exist. The length of send data is too short. The service has ended normally. The designated connection is already in use. The designated trigger cannot be used. The Connection Point in the target originator direction designated in ForwardOpen connection path via cyclic communication is already in use, and is Point to Point. The connection type you attempted to establish is Point To Point. The size being used differs from the size you are trying to establish. The connection in the send direction is not Point to Point. The connection parameter in the receive direction is not Point To Point or Multicast. The size you are trying to open is larger than the connection size of the DL-EP1.*1 The timeout multiplier is greater than 7. An RPI less than 500 s or greater than 10 s was designated.*2 VendorIDs do not match. ProductCodes do not match. DeviceTypes do not match. The revisions do not match.
9
Appendix
Forward_ Open 01H
0106H
0108H 0109H 0111H 0114H 0115H 0116H
9-28

General Status Additional (Extended) Status
Name
Description Connection Size of the ForwardOpen network connection parameter is 0. Connection Path of ForwardOpen does not include ConnectionPoint. In Connection Path class ID of ForwardOpen, a value other than 0x04 was set as cyclic or a value other than 02H was set as Class 3. In Class3, a value other than 1 is set as the instance ID of Connection Path of ForwardOpen. There is a setting unique to the product (data segment). In cyclic communication, an invalid Connection Point is designated in the send direction of Connection Path of ForwardOpen. In cyclic communication, a value other than 2 is designated as the Connection Size network connection parameter in the send direction of ForwardOpen. In cyclic communication, an invalid Connection Point is designated in the receive direction of Connection Path of ForwardOpen. An error occurred when the DL-EP1 was reinitializing communication or when it was communicating with a sensor amplifier. An unsupported sensor was connected. The connected sensors are in an unmixable combination. Too many sensors are connected. A product-unique setting error occurred. The appropriate device is not connected or an error occurred during communication between sensors. When "Check Model Match" is selected as compatibility check, ProductCodes do not match. When "Check Model Match" is selected as compatibility check, the major revisions or minor revisions do not match. When "Check Series" is selected as compatibility check, the series codes do not match.
0315H
01H
0322H 0323H
Forward_ Open
0324H 0326H 04C2H 0640H-067FH
06C0H-06FFH The number of occupied slots is different 0700H-073FH 0740H-077FH 0780H-07BFH
When "Check Series" is selected as compatibility check, the 07C0H-07FFH series version of the real machine is lower than the set series version. 02H 04H 05H 13H 15H Others 08H The maximum number of connections have already been used. The attribute ID is already designated. The designated instance ID does not exist. The length of send data is too short. The length of send data is too large. The designated service is not supported.
9
Appendix
*1
*2
Forward_Open is successful if the size you are trying to open is less than the size defined in the scan list. If this error occurs, an extended status is added and the data size of the tag defined in the second extended status is returned. RPI is set in increments of 500 s. If a value that cannot be divided by 500 s is set, an RPI rounded to the nearest 500 s is designated.
9-29

TCP/IP Interface Object (Class ID: F5H)

This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/ IP network interface. The IP address, subnet mask and gateway, etc, can be set. Class Class service This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Get_Attributes_All (01H). Class attribute (instance ID: 0)
Attribute ID 01H 02H 03H Name Revision Max Instance Number of Instances Description Object revision Maximum instance number Number of instances in generated object Attribute R R R Data Type UINT UINT UINT Parameter Range 0001H 0001H 0001H
Instance Instance service This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH), Set_Attribute_Single (10H), and Get_Attributes_All (01H). If the internal process of the previous Set_Attribute_Single in the Set_Attribute_Single executed for the writable Attribute ID is not completed, the general status "0CH" (Object State Conflict) is returned. Changes to the writable Attribute ID are reflected when the power supply is restarted or when the reset service is executed.
9
Appendix
9-30

Instance attributes (instance ID: 1)

Attribute ID 01H 02H 03H Name Status Configuration Capability Configuration Control Physical Link Object 04H Path size Path Interface Configuration IP Address Network Mask 05H Gateway Address Name Server Name Server 2 Domain Name Description Interface status Method for acquiring initial IP address Method in which the device acquires initialization at start-up Path to physical link object Path size (bytes) Segment for identifying physical link object TCP/IP network interface setting Device IP address (IP address) Device network mask (Subnet mask) Default gateway address (Gateway address) Primary name server (DNS server) Secondary name server (reserved) Default domain name (reserved) Host name Multicast TTL Multicast address setting Multicast address setting function (multicast allocation method) Reserved Number of multicast addresses (Number of multicast addresses) R/W R/W R/W R Attribute R R R/W Data Type DWORD DWORD Parameter Range Reference 1 Reference 2
DWORD Reference 3 Structure UINT Padded EPATH Structure UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT STRING 0004H 20F62401H Setting value*1 Setting value*1 Setting value*1 Setting value*1 Setting value*1 " "(character string can be set) " "(character string can be set) 1 (1 to 255) setting value1*1 0: Automatic allocation 1:Userdesignated allocation 00H For automatic allocation: 0020H For userdesignated allocation: 1 to 256*1 For automatic allocation: *2 For userdesignated allocation: Setting value*1
06H 08H
Host Name TTL Value Mcast Config
STRING USINT Structure
Alloc Control
USINT
9
Appendix
Reserved
USINT
09H
Num Mcast
R/W
UINT
Mcast Start Addr
Start multicast address (Allocation start multicast address)
UDINT
9-31

*1 If an invalid value is written, the general status 09H (Invalid Attribute Value) is returned. *2 When automatic allocation is selected, the start multicast address is calculated from the expression "239.192.1.0+ ((IP address host section -1) * 03FF) x 32). (Example) When the IP address is 192.168.0.10, the multicast address is as follows: Start address = 239.192.1.0 + (((192.168.0.10 - 1) & 0x3FF) << 5) = 239.192.1.0 + ((192.168.0.9 & 0x3FF) << 5) = 239.192.1.0 + (0.0.0.9 << 5) = 239.192.1.0 + 0.0.1.32 = 239.192.2.32 Reference 1) Status list
Bit 0 to 3 Name Interface Configuration Status Description 0: IP address is not set (BOOTP start state). 1: IP address is set. 2 or higher: The DL-EP1 returns nothing. This bit is set to 1 when "TTL Value" or "Mcast Config" is set. This bit is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on again. All these bits are fixed at OFF.
4 5 to 31
Mcast Pending Reserved
Reference 2) Configuration capability list

Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 to 31 Name BOOTP Client DNS Client DHCP Client DHCP-DNS Update Configuration Settable Reserved ON (fixed) OFF (fixed) OFF (fixed) OFF (fixed) ON (fixed) OFF (fixed) Description
9
Appendix
Reference 3) Configuration control list

Bit Name Description Display and set the "IP address setting method" of the IP address setting tool. 0: Fixed IP address 1:BOOTP 2 to 15: The IP address cannot be set. If the IP address is set, the general status 09H (Bad attribute data value) is returned. OFF (fixed): The operation set by this bit is ignored. All these bits are fixed at OFF.
0 to 3
StartupConfiguration
4 5 to 31
DNS Enable Reserved
9-32


Name General Status 00H 05H 00H Get_Attribute_Single 05H 14H 00H 05H Set_Attribute_Single 09H 0EH 13H 14H Others 08H Additional (Extended) Status Description The service has ended normally. The designated instance ID does not exist. The service has ended normally. The designated instance ID does not exist. The designated attribute ID does not exist. The service has ended normally. The designated instance ID does not exist. The written value is invalid. The designated attribute ID cannot be written. The length of send data is too short. The designated attribute ID does not exist. The designated service is not supported.
Get_Attributes_All
9
Appendix
9-33

Ethernet Link Object (Class ID: F6H)

This object provides Ethernet status information. Class Class service This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Get_Attributes_All (01H). Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)
Attribute ID 01H 02H 03H Name Revision Max Instance Number of Instances Description Object revision Maximum instance number Number of instances in generated object Attribute R R R Data Type UINT UINT UINT Parameter Range 0002H 0001H 0001H
Instance Instance service This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH), Set_Attribute_Single (10H), and Get_Attributes_All (01H). Instance attribute (instance ID: 01H)
Attribute ID 01H 02H 03H Name Interface Speed Interface Flags Physical Address Interface Counters Number of octets received on the interface. Includes the unnecessary multicast packets and discarded packets counted with In Discards. Number of unicast packets received on the interface. Does not include the discarded packets counted with In Discards. Description Interface communication speed Interface status flag MAC layer address Attribute R R R Data Type UDINT Parameter Range 10, 100
9
Appendix
04H
DWORD (Reference 1) ARRAY of 6 Current value USINTs Structure -
In Octets
UDINT R
Current value
In Ucast Packets
UDINT
Current value
9-34

Attribute ID Name Description Number of nonunicast packets received on the interface. Includes the unnecessary multicast packets but does not include the discarded packets counted with In Discards. Number of inbound packets discarded after they had been received on the interface. Number of inbound packets including errors. Not included in In Discards. Number of inbound packets including unknown protocols. Number of octets received on the interface. Number of unicast packets sent on the interface. Number of nonunicast packets sent on the interface. Number of discarded outbound packets. Number of outbound packets including errors. Counter unique to media. Number of received frames whose lengths are not an octet integer. Number of received frames for which FCS check is unsuccessful. Number of successfully sent frames with only one collision. Number of successfully sent frames with two or more collisions. Number of times SQE test error messenger was generated. Number of frames whose first transmission was deferred because media was busy. Number of collisions detected in packet transmission later than 512-bit time. Number of frames whose transmission failed because of excessive collisions. Attribute Data Type Parameter Range
In NUcast Packets
UDINT
Current value
In Discards
UDINT
Current value
In Errors 04H In Unknown Protos Out Octets Out Ucast Packets Out NUcast Packets Out Discards Out Errors Media Counters Alignment Errors FCS Errors Single Collisions Multiple Collisions 05H SQE Test Errors
UDINT R UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT Structure UDINT
Current value
0 (fixed) Current value Current value Current value Current value Current value Current value
UDINT
Current value
UDINT
0 (fixed)
UDINT R
0 (fixed)
9
Appendix
UDINT
0 (fixed)
Deferred Transmissions
UDINT
0 (fixed)
Late Collisions
UDINT
0 (fixed)
Excessive Collisions
UDINT
0 (fixed)
9-35

Attribute ID Name MAC Transmit Errors Description Attribute Data Type UDINT Parameter Range 0 (fixed)
05H
06H
Number of frames whose transmission failed because of internal MAC sublayer transmit error. Number of times the carrier sense condition was lost or Carrier Sense not asserted when an Errors attempt was made to send frames. Number of received frames that exceeded the Frame Too Long maximum tolerable frame size. Number of frames that could not be received on MAC Receive the interface due to an Errors internal MAC sublayer receive error. Interface Setting of the following Control physical interfaces. Interface control bit Control Bits (designation of AutoNego, full duplex). Operation speed forced by Forced interface (fixed to 10 Interface Speed Mbps, etc.).
UDINT R UDINT
Current value
Current value
UDINT
0 (fixed)
Following structure WORD (Reference 2) Setting value*1
UINT
*1
The following interface speeds can be set as Forced Interface Speed. When auto-negotiation is disabled (half-duplex): fixed at 10 Mbps (setting value: 10) When auto-negotiation is enabled (half-duplex/full duplex): 100/10 Mbps automatic (setting value: 0 or 100) Reference 1) Interface flags list
Bit Name Link Status Half/Full Duplex OFF: Non-active link ON: Active link OFF: Half-duplex ON: Full duplex (OFF when Link Status=0) 0: Auto-negotiation is in progress. 1: Auto-negotiation and speed could not be detected. 2: Auto-negotiation failed but speed was successfully detected. 3: Speed and duplex mode were successfully negotiated. 4: Auto-negotiation cannot be performed. (When communication speed is fixed at 10 Mbps) OFF: Changes can be automatically reflected. ON: Reset service is required to reflect changes (fixed). OFF (fixed) OFF (fixed) Description
9
Appendix
0 1
2 to 4
Negotiation Status
5 6 7 to 31
Manual Setting Requires Speed Local Hardware Fault Reserved
9-36

Reference 2) Control bits list Bit

0 1 2 to 15
Name
Auto-negotiate ForcedDuplex Mode Reserved
Description
OFF: Auto-negotiation is disabled (communication setting is fixed at 10 Mbps). ON: Auto-negotiation is enabled (communication setting is fixed at 100/10 Mbps auto). OFF (fixed) OFF (fixed)

Error Code General Status 00H 05H 00H Get_Attribute_Single 05H 14H 00H 05H 09H Set_Attribute_Single 0CH 0EH 13H 14H Others 08H Additional (Extended) Status Description The service has ended normally. The designated instance ID does not exist. The service has ended normally. The designated instance ID does not exist. The designated attribute ID does not exist. The service has ended normally. The designated instance ID does not exist. The written value is invalid. The object cannot execute the requested service in the current state. The designated attribute ID cannot be written. The length of send data is too short. The designated attribute ID does not exist. The designated service is not supported.
Get_Attributes_All
9
Appendix
9-37
MEMO
9
Appendix
9-38
9-7
C
Index
Usable Connections ...................... 7-7 Using DL Object .......................... 7-44 What can Cyclic Communication do? .................................................. 7-6 What can Message Communication do? ................................................ 7-22 What is EtherNet/IP? ...................... 7-2
Checking the Package Contents .......... 1-3 Package contents .......................... 1-3 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1 .................................................. 2-12 DL-EP1 Settings ........................... 2-12 Configuring Communication with the Scanner ................................................. 2-15 Setting the scanner ..................... 2-15 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers ...... 9-2 Connectable Sensor Amplifiers ... 9-2 Mixed Connection of Sensor amplifiers ........................................ 9-3
G
GT2 Series Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 3-8 Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 3-15 Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication ...... 3-28 Checking the Device Compatibility ................................ 3-20 Communication Methods ............ 3-17 Configuring Cyclic Communication .............................. 3-6 Configuring Message Communication ............................ 3-22 Cyclic communication ................... 3-5 DL Object (Class ID:67H) ........... 3-31 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Functions ........................................ 3-3 Message Communication ........... 3-21 Objects and Services .................. 3-25 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ........ 3-27 Overview of Communication Methods .......................................... 3-3 Reading the DL Object Table .... 3-30 Usable Connections ...................... 3-7 Using DL Object .......................... 3-46 What can Cyclic Communication do? .................................................. 3-6 What can Message Communication do? ................................................ 3-22 What is EtherNet/IP? ...................... 3-2 GT-70A Series Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 4-8 Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 4-15 Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication ...... 4-28 Checking the Device Compatibility ................................ 4-20 Communication Methods ............ 4-17
D
Data Processing Time ............................ 8-3 Device Profile .......................................... 9-5 Dimensions ............................................. 8-5 DL-EP1 Overview ................................... 1-2 Overview ......................................... 1-2 Types and Number of Connectable Sensor Amplifiers ........................... 1-2
F
FD-MH Series Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 7-8 Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 7-15 Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication ....... 7-28 Checking the Device Compatibility ................................ 7-20 Communication Methods ............ 7-17 Configuring Cyclic Communication .............................. 7-6 Configuring Message Communication ............................ 7-22 Cyclic communication ................... 7-5 DL Object (Class ID:67H) ........... 7-31 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Functions ........................................ 7-3 Message Communication ........... 7-21 Objects and Services .................. 7-25 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ......... 7-27 Overview of Communication Methods .......................................... 7-3 Reading the DL Object Table .... 7-30
9
Appendix
9-39
9-7 Index
Configuring Cyclic Communication .............................. 4-6 Configuring Message Communication ............................ 4-22 Cyclic communication .................. 4-5 DL Object (Class ID:67H) ........... 4-31 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Functions ........................................ 4-3 Message Communication ........... 4-21 Objects and Services ................. 4-25 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ........ 4-27 Overview of Communication Methods .......................................... 4-3 Reading the DL Object Table .... 4-30 Usable Connections ...................... 4-7 Using DL Object .......................... 4-45 What can Cyclic Communication do? .................................................. 4-6 What can Message Communication do? ................................................ 4-22 What is EtherNet/IP? ..................... 4-2
I
IB Series Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 6-8 Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 6-16 Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication ...... 6-29 Checking the Device Compatibility ................................ 6-21 Communication Methods ........... 6-18 Configuring Cyclic Communication .............................. 6-6 Configuring Message Communication ............................ 6-23 Cyclic communication .................. 6-5 DL Object (Class ID:67H) ........... 6-32 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Functions ........................................ 6-3 Message Communication ........... 6-22 Objects and Services ................. 6-26 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ........ 6-28 Overview of Communication Methods .......................................... 6-3 Reading the DL Object Table .... 6-31 Usable Connections ...................... 6-7 Using DL Object .......................... 6-53 What can Cyclic Communication do? .................................................. 6-6
What can Message Communication do? ................................................ 6-23 What is EtherNet/IP? ..................... 6-2 IG Series Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 5-8 Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 5-15 Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication ...... 5-28 Checking the Device Compatibility ................................ 5-20 Communication Methods ........... 5-17 Configuring Cyclic Communication ............................. 5-6 Configuring Message Communication ........................... 5-22 Cyclic communication .................. 5-5 DL Object (Class ID:67H) .......... 5-31 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Functions ........................................ 5-3 Message Communication .......... 5-21 Objects and Services ................. 5-25 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ........ 5-27 Overview of Communication Methods ......................................... 5-3 Reading the DL Object Table .... 5-30 Usable Connections ..................... 5-7 Using DL Object .......................... 5-52 What can Cyclic Communication do? .................................................. 5-6 What can Message Communication do? ................................................ 5-22 What is EtherNet/IP? ..................... 5-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers ................................................ 2-3 Assigning ID Numbers ................. 2-6 Mounting and connection to Sensor Amplifiers ....................................... 2-3
9
Appendix
N
Names and Functions of Each Part ..... 1-4
O
Objects usable by DL-EP1 Assembly Object (class ID: 04H) 9-26 Connection Manager Object (class ID: 06H) ............................. 9-28 Ethernet Link Object (class ID: F6H) ............................. 9-34
9-40
9-7Index
Identity Object (class ID: 01H) ... 9-22 List of Usable Objects ................. 9-20 Message Router Object (class ID: 02H) ............................. 9-25 Reading Each Object Table ....... 9-21 TCP/IP Interface Object (class ID: F5H) ............................. 9-30
P
Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC ...... 9-9 Procedures for Communication with an Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 PLC ................................ 9-15 Procedures from Installation before Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration ...... 2-2 Configuration Procedures ............. 2-2
S
Specifications ......................................... 8-2
T
Troubleshooting ...................................... 9-6
W
Wiring ..................................................... 2-10 Connecting a communication cable ............................................. 2-10
9
Appendix
9-41
Revision History Print date March, 2011 Revision no. Initial release Description
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted. (2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyers intended use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products. (3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples. (4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS A FFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTYS CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.
BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1110-2
Copyright (c) 2011 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 96140E 1031-1 96140E Printed in Japan

Dl-Ep1 Um 96140e e 1031-1

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Dl-Ep1 Um 96140e e 1031-1

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

96140E

EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit

It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.

It indicates additional information on proper operation.

It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

It indicates reference pages.

Safety Information for DL-EP1

Precautions for Use

About the Power Supply

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

Manuals related to CPU unit

PLC CPU unit EtherNet/IP scanner unit

Manuals related to EtherNet/IP scanner unit

DL-EP1 (this unit)

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

This chapter provides the parameter list, as well as troubleshooting instructions.

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

Chapter 1 Before Using

Chapter 2 Connection and Configuration

2-3 2-4 2-5

Chapter 3 Communicating with the GT2 Series

Chapter 4 Communicating with GT-70A Series

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

Chapter 5 Communicating with IG Series

Chapter 6 Communicating with IB Series

Chapter 7 Communicating with FD-MH Series

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

Terms Used in This Document

D-bus PLC Ladder program

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

1-1 1-2 1-3

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

PLC or other host device (EtherNet/IP unit)

EtherNet/IP adaptor DL-EP1 (this unit)

Connectable Sensor Amplifiers

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

Checking the Package Contents

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

Names and Functions of Each Part

Name (1) RJ-45 connector (2) Reset switch

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

1-3 Names and Functions of Each Part

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

Connection and Configuration

2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

Procedures from Installation before Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration

1. Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers

Connecting the DL-EP1 to sensor amplifiers (Page 2-4)

Assigning ID Numbers (Page 2-6)

3. Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1

4. Configuring Communication with the Scanner

Registering the device profile of the DL-EP1 (Page 2-15)

Configuring the Scanner Side (Refer to each scanner manual.)

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -

Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers

Mounting and connection to Sensor Amplifiers

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 Users Manual -